Quarterlytics / Real Estate / REIT - Diversified / Shaftesbury PLC

Shaftesbury PLC

shb.l · LSE Real Estate
Claim this profile
Ticker shb.l
Exchange LSE
Sector Real Estate
Industry REIT - Diversified
Employees 11-50
← All annual reports
FY2017 Annual Report · Shaftesbury PLC
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
S

h

a

f

t

e

s

b

u

r

y

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

7

ANNUAL REPORT 2017 
 
 
Shaftesbury in numbers 

Strategic report Overview
1  
2  Highlights  
4  Chairman’s statement  
7  Chief Executive's statement  
11  Our business model: how we create and deliver value  
12  Exceptional portfolio in the heart of London's west end  
21  Focus on restaurants, leisure and retail
22  Creating distinctive, lively and interesting destinations 
26  How we measure success  
28  Sustainability and stakeholders

Strategic report Annual review
36  Portfolio valuation
40  Leasing and occupancy
48  Portfolio investment
50  Financial results
56  Financial management
59  Risk management
64  Viability statement

Governance 
68  Our people
72  Governance at a glance
74  Corporate Governance
80  Nomination Committee report 
82  Audit Committee report 
86  Remuneration report 
89  Remuneration at a glance
90  Summary of remuneration policy 
92  Annual remuneration report 
102  Directors’ report 
104  Directors’ responsibilities
105  Independent auditor’s report

Financial statements 
114  Group statement of comprehensive income
115  Balance sheets
116  Cash flow statements
117  Statements of changes in equity
118  Notes to the financial statements

Other information 
140  Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)
142  Portfolio analysis
142  Basis of valuation 
144  Summary report by the valuers
146  Shareholder information
147  Glossary of terms

Strategic report Overview

Shaftesbury is a real estate investment trust  
which invests exclusively in the liveliest parts of 
London’s West End. Our objective is to deliver 
long-term growth in rental income, capital  
values and shareholder returns.
Focussed on restaurants, leisure and retail,  
our exceptional portfolio is clustered mainly  
in Carnaby, Seven Dials and Chinatown, but  
also includes substantial ownerships in east and  
west Covent Garden, Soho and Fitzrovia.

Shaftesbury in numbers

 141/2 acres
  AND 1.9 ACRES OWNED IN  

JOINT VENTURE

 1.8m sq.ft.

   COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL 
SPACE AND 0.3M SQ.FT. IN 
JOINT VENTURE

 584  SHOPS, RESTAURANTS, 

CAFÉS AND PUBS

 £3.64bn

  PORTFOLIO VALUATION¹

 £114.1m

   ANNUALISED CURRENT  

INCOME2

 £144.5m

  ESTIMATED RENTAL VALUE2

 6.6%

   OF ERV2 HELD FOR, OR  
UNDER, REFURBISHMENT

 £9.52

   EPRA NAV¹

 26.7%

   LOAN TO VALUE1,3

1   An alternative performance measure (“APM”). See page 140
2  See Glossary on page 147 for definitions
3  Based on net debt and including our 50% share of the Longmartin joint venture

1

     
Highlights

Reported results

NET ASSET VALUE  
PER SHARE3,6 (£ per share)

NET PROPERTY  INCOME  
(£m)

BASIC EPS  
(pence per share)

DIVIDENDS  
(pence per share)

+10.7%

+5.0%

+203.7%

+8.8%

9
4
.
9

7
5
.
8

6
3
8

.

1
8
6

.

7
2
.
5

3
.
8
8

1
.
4
8

.

8
8
7

1
.
4
7

9
.
7
6

2
.
5
6
1

.

0
8
6
1

0
.
5
6

1
.
8
0
1

6
.
5
3

0
.
6
1

7
.
4
1

5
7
.
3
1

1
.
3
1

5
.
2
1

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

EPRA results1,3

NAV PER SHARE  
(£ per share)

+7.2%

9
6
8

.

8
8
 8

.

2
5
.
9

3
1
.
7

7
6
.
5

NET ASSET VALUE RETURN 
(%)

EPRA EARNINGS  
(£m)

EPRA EPS  
(pence per share)

+8.9%

+15.9%

+15.7%

.

0
8
2

.

8
3
2

.

3
6
1

2
.
5
4

0
.
9
 3

1
.
6
 3

.

6
2
3

.

2
0
3

2
.
6
1

.

0
4
1

.

0
2
1

.

2
2
 1

.

0
3
 1

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

9
.
8

7
1
0
2

8
3

.

6
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

2

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                             
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Portfolio highlights

TOTAL 
VALUATION2,3 (£bn)

LIKE-FOR-LIKE VALUATION 
GROWTH2,3 (%)

NET  
INVESTMENT2,3 (£m)

REVERSIONARY  
POTENTIAL2 (£m)

£3.64bn

+7.0%

£65.1m

£30.4m 

4
6
.
3

5
3
3

.

3
1
.
3

1
6
2

.

5
0
2

.

0
.
1
2

.

0
8
1

5
.
9

0
.
7

0
4

.

1
.
0
3
1

3
.
5
9

1
.
5
6

1
.
5
6

5
.
0
5

5
.
4
4
1

7
.
8
3
1

6
.
9
0
1

1
.
4
1
1

.

6
8
1
1

8
.
7
2
 1

.

6
2
0
1

9
.
5
0
1

9
.
5
8

5
.
3
9

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

50

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

  Annualised current income         
  ERV

Financial management2

LOAN TO VALUE3,4 
(%)

INTEREST COVER3 
(TIMES)

BLENDED COST OF DEBT3,5  
(%)

WEIGHTED AVERAGE  
MATURITY OF DEBT 

26.7%

4
.
9
2

7
.
6
2

.

2
4
2

.

6
3
2

.

2
2
2

2.3x

3.3%

10.3years

0
2

.

0
2

.

1
.
 2

1
.
 2

3
.
 2

1
.
5

1
.
5

9
.
4

5
.
4

.

2
0
1

2
.
9

3
.
0
1

3
.
3

1
.
7

8
.
5

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

1  For EPRA definitions, see Glossary on page 147

4  Based on net debt

2  Including our 50% of the Longmartin joint venture

5 Including non-utilisation fees on undrawn bank facilities

3  Alternative performance measures (“APM”), See page 140

6 Excluding non-core asset acquired as part of a portfolio

3

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
Chairman’s 
Statement

I am delighted to report another strong set 
of results, following a busy and successful 
year for the Group. Our focussed strategy 
has continued to deliver our objectives of 
growth in both income and the value of our 
exceptional portfolio, along with long-term, 
sector-leading returns for shareholders. 

Our business

Over the 31 years since Shaftesbury was formed, we have assembled 
an impossible-to-replicate portfolio in the heart of London’s 
West End of some 600 buildings across 14½ acres. The renowned 
and enduring appeal of London’s West End to a global audience 
of visitors and businesses brings a resilience to its economy not 
seen elsewhere in the UK and in very few cities across the world.

Underpinned by an estimated 200 million annual visits to the 
West End, our business focusses on the 1.1 million sq. ft. of restaurant, 
leisure and retail space that we own in high profile, popular locations. 
With our forensic knowledge of the West End, we curate 
distinctive, interesting and lively destinations which attract 
Londoners, a large and important local working population, 
domestic visitors, and international tourists in numbers 
unmatched by any city destination in the western world. 

Continuing value creation and 
income growth

Our portfolio, now valued1 at £3.64 billion, continues to deliver 
rental and capital growth, but with relatively low capital 
expenditure. 

We have continued our long record of crystallising our portfolio’s 
reversionary potential into contracted cash flow, whilst growing 
this potential further. Together with significantly reduced finance 
costs following important refinancing activity, this has driven 
strong growth in earnings over the year. The Board is delighted 
to recommend a final dividend of 8.1p, bringing the total 
distribution for the year to 16.0p, an increase of 8.8%. This 
follows last year’s increase of 6.9%.

Focus on culture, governance 
and sustainability 

In my first year with Shaftesbury, I have come to appreciate the 
culture of this business and the important part it plays in supporting 
our strategy and our continuing success. Importantly, our strategy, 
and every aspect of its implementation, prioritises long-term 
goals, planning and sustainable outcomes over short-term gains 
and rewards. 

We pride ourselves in being open, transparent and engaged, 
not just with shareholders but also with our wide array of 
stakeholders, including our employees, local communities, 
neighbours and local authorities. We ensure that our Board 
decision-making includes consideration of these important 
stakeholders. 

The Board and I are committed to maintaining the high standards 
of corporate governance and behaviour we have demonstrated 
for many years. 

Succession planning throughout the organisation is an essential 
aspect of our long-term strategy. My responsibility is to ensure 
that the Board’s membership continues to evolve so that we 
have access to the broad skills and experience required to 
support the current and future needs of the business.  

4

1 An alternative performance measure (APM). See page 140

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
  
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

The knowledge and enthusiasm of our management team have been critical 
to the successful implementation of our strategy. Our employee retention 
record, which is a testament to the working environment we offer, is exceptional. 
We invest in training and developing our employees, to ensure they grow in 
their roles and that we maintain a pipeline of talent for internal promotion.  

A key aspect of our long-term success is the socially responsible way in 
which we run our business. We see the preservation and enhancement of 
our iconic destinations as critical to our long-term future and we are 
committed to bringing economic and environmental sustainability through 
the stewardship of our extensive ownership of mainly older buildings. 
Creating prosperous, appealing locations which support the businesses of 
our commercial occupiers, and which benefit the important residential 
communities in and around our areas, creates the conditions which sustain 
the long-term prospects of our business. 

Outlook

Whilst UK economic and political uncertainty is unsettling business 
confidence and investment, London continues to thrive. Its long-term 
prospects, and those of the West End, are underpinned by their global 
status and appeal, excellent connectivity and dynamic, creative, broad-
based economy. 

Over my first year, it has become increasingly apparent that this business 
has many strengths, from our exceptional portfolio through to a quality 
team, a proven and evolving long-term strategy and a robust balance sheet. 

I am confident we shall continue to meet today’s challenges, capture 
tomorrow’s opportunities and maintain our long record of delivering 
sustained growth in income, capital value and shareholder returns.

Board changes

Oliver Marriott retired from the Board in July and I would like to thank him 
for his outstanding contribution to Shaftesbury during his eight-year tenure. 
On 28 November 2017, Richard Akers will join the Board as a non-executive 
director, and I am sure his broad range of real estate and corporate skills 
and experience will be invaluable.

Jonathan Nicholls 
Chairman

27 November 2017

5

With increasing numbers of visitors to the West End and the widely-recog-

nised growth in interest and spending on leisure activities, our 282 restau-

rants, cafés and pubs are important drivers of footfall and trading in our 

locations.

6

Chief 
Executive’s 
Statement

  It is pleasing to report another year of good progress and strong results, 
against a backdrop of economic uncertainty.  

EPRA EARNINGS1 

DIVIDENDS PER SHARE

EPRA NAV PER SHARE1

£45.2m
+15.9% 

16.0p
+8.8% 

£9.52
+7.2%

Growing earnings

Continued demand for space in our popular and busy 
locations, together with our proven management strategy, 
has resulted in an increase in net property income of 5.0% 
to £88.3 million. We are now reaping the benefits of the 
important refinancing initiatives we completed in October last 
year, which significantly reduced our finance costs. Together, 
these factors have contributed to an increase in EPRA 
earnings1 of £6.2 million to £45.2 million, which equates to 
an increase in EPRA earnings per share1 of 15.7%. 

Uplift in NAV

Our exceptional portfolio has delivered underlying capital 
value growth of 7.0% over the year, adding 83 pence (9.3%) 
to EPRA net asset value per share1. The increase in value 
reflects the combined impact of growing current income 
and the prospect of sustained future income growth, 
particularly in locations which are expected to benefit from 
Crossrail-related footfall in the coming years. Limited 
opportunities to buy the type of buildings we own, and 
continuing strong investor demand, have led to a reduction 
in investment yields in the West End market, particularly in 
the second half of the year.

This valuation uplift has been offset partly by the cost of 
terminating our remaining legacy interest rate swaps, which 
amounted to 20 pence per share. At 30 September 2017, 
EPRA NAV per share1 stood at £9.52, an increase of 64 
pence, or 7.2%.

1 Alternative performance measures (APMs). See page 140

7

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017   
 
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  CHIEF ExECUTIVE’S STATEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

A unique portfolio in an 
exceptional location

West End connectivity and 
infrastructure

Our portfolio extends to some 600 buildings across 14½ acres of London’s 
West End. 

Our investment strategy is focussed on restaurants, leisure and retail, uses 
which, in the West End, have a long record of resilience and growth. Our 
long-term management strategy of assembling clusters of ownerships 
enables us to curate and promote distinctive destinations which offer a wide 
variety of innovative, mid-market choices in dining, leisure and retail.

London is the largest city in Western Europe and most visited city in the 
western world, with an estimated 19.1 million international visitors in 2016. 
Current forecasts point to a growth in tourist numbers of around 3.5% per 
annum through to 2025. 

Located at its heart is the West End, with its exceptional variety of visitor 
attractions, from cultural and historic to dining and shopping. The exceptional 
numbers of domestic and international visitors, together with a large local 
working population, mean that the West End is busy seven-days-a-week, 
throughout the year. It offers a prosperous trading environment for our 
occupiers, attracting demand for space and sustaining growth in our rental 
values and income.

Within the West End, the availability of space, particularly for restaurant, 
leisure and retail uses, is constrained by local planning and other policies. 
This structural imbalance between demand for, and availability of, space is 
fundamental to our portfolio’s rental and capital value prospects.

The completion of Crossrail 1 is now a year away, with the first services on 
the Elizabeth line expected in December 2018. Once fully operational, this 
important addition to London’s transport network will add 10% to its 
capacity, and materially improve accessibility to the West End. Over the 
medium term, we expect the new transport hubs at Tottenham Court Road 
and Bond Street will result in significant changes to traditional footfall 
patterns throughout the West End. With all our portfolio in close proximity 
to these hubs, we anticipate being a major beneficiary of these changes, 
with a number of our streets expected to see much increased footfall and 
profile, enhancing their long-term rental growth prospects.

Continuing investment across the transport network is improving reliability 
and increasing capacity, encouraging travel by public transport to the West 
End. Last year’s introduction of 24-hour running at weekends on certain 
underground lines has been well-received, and initial passenger numbers 
have exceeded forecasts.

Elsewhere, we are seeing a number of Crossrail-related public realm 
schemes progressing. Of great importance to the West End is the initiative 
announced, earlier this year, to pedestrianise much of Oxford Street. This 
will bring significant benefits, including a much-improved pedestrian 
environment and a reduction in traffic-generated air pollution. Currently, it 
is expected that the first stage of pedestrianisation, west of Oxford Circus, 
will be operational by mid-2018. Planning for the eastern end of Oxford 
Street is underway. 

The West End economy

In our long experience, the breadth of the West End’s economy provides 
considerable protection from the cyclicality and headwinds experienced by 
the UK national economy.  

Over the year, business and consumer confidence has begun to come under 
pressure, and growth in the national economy is slowing. However, conditions 
in the West End have so far largely been unaffected. In particular, weakness 
in sterling has provided a boost to the spending power of international visitors 
as well as increasing visitor numbers. Our restaurants, cafés, bars and shops 
are reporting resilient trading growth, better enabling them to absorb 
upward pressures on operating costs currently faced by all businesses.

Demand for the smaller accommodation that traditionally we offer is 
healthy. Lettings, lease renewals and rent reviews are being concluded on 
terms in line with our expectations, and vacancy levels have remained in line 
with our long-term trend of 3%, or less, of portfolio ERV.

We are making good progress at our three larger schemes. 46% by ERV of 
the completed space is now either let or under offer and marketing of the 
remaining space continues. This larger space we are offering requires 
occupiers to invest significant sums in fit-out and take on substantial rental 
commitments and we expect letting periods to be longer than for smaller 
space. Macro-economic uncertainties are now showing signs of slowing 
potential occupiers’ decision–making processes. We shall be patient in 
selecting occupiers which match our long-term aspirations. 

The widely reported increase in national business rates took effect in April 
2017. As we anticipated, average increases for our occupiers were in the 
range of 30% to 40%, with a large number of our smaller tenants able to 
benefit from a four-year transition period. Occupiers of large space on 
streets where rental levels are above our average have seen greater 
increases, and only limited transition provisions. Despite these unwelcome 
increases in operating costs for our tenants, we have not seen any direct 
impact on occupancy levels or interest in leasing space.

During the year, we concluded £31.1 million of leasing transactions, achieving 
rents for commercial space 6.7% above ERV at the previous year end. This is 
not only converting an element of our reversionary potential in to 
contracted income, but it also provides valuable evidence to increase rental 
tones and grow income from our adjacent and nearby buildings.

8

Investing in our portfolio

Our strategy is to adapt our buildings to meet the expectations of today’s 
occupiers, and improve energy performance, through reconfiguration and 
refurbishment, rather than redevelopment. We focus on uses where we 
provide space in shell form only, with tenants taking responsibility for what 
are often substantial fit-out costs. This significantly reduces our exposure to 
obsolescence costs across the portfolio. Consequently, despite continuing 
high levels of activity across our holdings, capital expenditure remains 
modest. This year, our outlay was £40.3 million, slightly above our long-term 
average of around 1% of portfolio value. Additionally, our share of capital 
expenditure in the Longmartin joint venture was £1.2 million.

We continue to identify schemes across our portfolio, and are prepared to 
intervene to negotiate early vacant possession of space to accelerate our 
plans. We balance the costs of these initiatives against the valuable 
long-term benefits to income and capital values, which frequently 
compound across our extensive adjacent ownerships.

Adding to our portfolio

We have assembled our portfolio over a period of 31 years, through acquiring 
single buildings, small portfolios, or occasionally large blocks, which were in 
single ownership. We apply strict investment criteria to every purchase, and 
focus on the prospects for long-term income growth potential through 
harnessing our forensic market knowledge, our particular skills in improving 
older building stock and capturing synergies with our other ownerships.

The buildings we seek to acquire in our chosen locations are frequently in 
long-term private ownership. Their availability is always limited, as existing 
owners are reluctant to sell in our sought-after areas. Understandably, 
competition to purchase is intense, as other investors appreciate the 
long-term prospects and security they offer.

This year, additions to our portfolio totalled £37.1 million. In addition, in 
August 2017, we announced the forward purchase of a strategically important 
block on Berwick Street in Soho, for £38.5 million. Currently, it is undergoing 
a major redevelopment, which is expected to finish in late 2018, at which 
point we will complete the acquisition.

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  CHIEF ExECUTIVE’S STATEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Refinancing legacy debt and hedging

Looking ahead

Taking advantage of low long-term interest rates, over the year, we have 
taken important steps to refinance the remainder of our legacy debt and 
hedging, whilst adding to our financial resources.

We have issued £575 million of long-dated bonds, comprising £285 million 
for 15 years at 2.487% and £290 million for 10 years at 2.348%. The 
proceeds were used, in part, to fund the early repayment of our historical 
debenture stock and a bank facility. In addition, we have terminated our 
remaining £180 million of interest rate swaps.

Together, these transactions reduced the cost of our debt significantly, 
benefiting earnings and dividends, as well as adding around £310 million to 
our financial resources. In a competitive investment market, the ready 
availability of funding to secure acquisitions gives us a valuable advantage.

Long-term rewards of a long-term 
strategy

October 2017 marked the 30th anniversary of the listing of Shaftesbury’s 
shares on the London Stock Exchange. In our early years, whilst we owned a 
block of 26 restaurants in the centre of Chinatown, our assets comprised 
mainly offices in London and several UK locations. From mid-1993, we 
refocussed the business, concentrating on restaurant, leisure and retail in 
London’s West End.

Our long-term approach to assembling and managing this exceptional portfolio 
has delivered sustainable growth in income, which is the ultimate driver of 
long-term value. The success of this strategy is evident in our performance. 
Since we floated in 1987, our share price has risen 460%, compared with the 
FTSE 350 Real Estate Index of 94%, and since our focus switched to the 
West End, the increase has been 1,431% against 119% for the sector.

The uncertainties created by last year’s EU referendum decision have 
increased during 2017. It may be some time before the UK’s future trading 
and other arrangements with the EU become clear, and there could be further 
challenges as their ramifications become apparent. Inevitably, business and 
consumer confidence is being affected, slowing economic growth and 
business investment.

The broad economic base of the West End, and its enduring global appeal to 
visitors and businesses, underpin its resilience and long-term prospects, providing 
a considerable degree of protection against national economic headwinds. 
This has been evident in the strength of our performance through different 
business cycles and operating environments in our 31-year history.

The successful implementation of our distinctive strategy is due to our 
committed, experienced and enthusiastic team, supported by the wide range 
of external advisors who are invaluable in delivering our strategy. Together, they 
bring flair and innovation to the management of our portfolio, ensuring it 
evolves and adapts to meet the ever-changing tastes and expectations of all 
those who visit, work or establish businesses in the West End.

Underwritten by the unique features of the West End, we are confident our 
strategy will continue our long record of growing our exceptional portfolio’s 
income and value, and, in turn, the returns we deliver to our shareholders.   

Brian Bickell 
Chief Executive

27 November 2017

RELATIVE SHARE PRICE PERFORMANCE SINCE 
LISTING IN 1987

RELATIVE SHARE PRICE PERFORMANCE FOLLOWING 
REFOCUS ON THE WEST END IN 1993

  Shaftesbury        

  FTSE 350 Real Estate

Both rebased to 100

  Shaftesbury        

  FTSE 350 Real Estate

Both rebased to 100

460%

+366%

94%

100

Oct 87 

100

Oct 17

Jul 93    

1,431%

+1,312%

119%

Oct 17

9

10

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  CHIEF ExECUTIVE’S STATEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

What we own

EXCEPTIONAL PORTFOLIO IN THE HEART OF THE WEST END

clustered in popular destinations                

focussed on restaurants, leisure and shops

282

RESTAURANTS, 
CAFÉS AND 
PUBS

3

7

%

302

SHOPS

0.4

m  
sq.ft.

OFFICES

562

APARTMENTS

33 %

1

3

%

17 %

% of current annualised income1

see page 12

see page 21

35%

32%

22%

CARNABY 

COVENT GARDEN 

CHINATOWN 

7%

SOHO 

4%              

FITZROVIA  

What we do

CREATE DISTINCTIVE, LIVELY AND INTERESTING DESTINATIONS     SUPPORTED BY

FORENSIC 
KNOWLEDGE  
OF THE  
WEST END 

 LONG-TERM 
HOLISTIC  
CURATION OF 
OUR AREAS

MANAGEMENT 
STRATEGY 

OWNERSHIP 
CLUSTERS 

INVEST IN 
THE PUBLIC 
REALM 

IMPROVE 
OUR  
BUILDINGS 

PROMOTE OUR 
DESTINATIONS 

FOOTFALL AND 
SPENDING

SUSTAINED  
DEMAND

LOW 
VACANCY

ExPERIENCED  
MANAGEMENT TEAM

see page 23

PRUDENT FINANCIAL  
MANAGEMENT

see page 56

FOCUS ON SUSTAINABILITY 
AND STAKEHOLDERS

see page 28

EFFECTIVE  
GOVERNANCE

see page 22

see page 74

How we deliver value

GROWING CONTRACTED 
INCOME AND RENTAL  
POTENTIAL

GROWTH IN EARNINGS  
AND DIVIDENDS

LONG-TERM GROWTH IN  
PORTFOLIO VALUE AND TOTAL 
SHAREHOLDER RETURNS

see page 26 for how we measure success

1  Wholly-owned portfolio

11
11

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
          
Exceptional

portfolio

in the heart of 
London’s West End

over 31 years to 
accumulate and 
impossible to 
replicate

141/2 acres and  
1.9 acres owned 
in joint venture 

Accumulated over 31 years, our portfolio 
comprises nearly 600 buildings, mostly of 
domestic size, close to the West End’s 
world-class visitor attractions. 

The areas in which we invest are long-established, 
with street patterns generally laid out between 
1680 and 1720. Our wholly-owned portfolio is 
all within Conservation Areas and around 20% 
of our buildings are listed as being of special 
architectural interest. 

The buildings we seek to acquire are typically 
in long-term private ownership, and, in our 
experience, existing owners are unwilling to 
sell in this resilient area. We believe it would 
be impossible to replicate a portfolio such as 
ours in these vibrant and prosperous locations. 

PORTFOLIO VALUATION1

6%

4%

7%

35%

£3.64bn

22%

26%

CARNABY
COVENT GARDEN
CHINATOWN
SOHO
FITZROVIA
LONGMARTIN

ANNUALISED CURRENT 
INCOME2

13%

37%

£105.3m

17%

33%
RESTAURANTS, CAFÉS AND LEISURE
SHOPS
OFFICES
RESIDENTIAL

1  Including our 50% share of the Longmartin joint venture

2  Wholly-owned portfolio

12

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  PORTFOLIO  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

c. 600 buildings 
clustered in iconic, 
high footfall 
locations

1.8 million sq. ft.  
of commercial and 
residential space 
and 0.3 m sq. ft. 
held in joint venture

100% of our portfolio 
is between five and 
ten minutes’ walk  
of an Underground/
Elizabeth Line station 

T

E

E

R

T

E   S

G

D

O

O

G

T

O

T

T

E

N

FITZROVIA
0.8 acres

H

A

M

C

O

U

R

T

R

O

A

D

O X F O RD   S T RE E T

TOTTENHAM COURT ROAD

BOND STREET

OXFORD CIRCUS

R

E

G

E

N

T

S

T

R

E

E

T

CARNABY
4.3 acres

SOHO
1.4 acres

C

H

A

R

I

N
G

C
R
O

S

S

SEVEN DIALS
3.2 acres

R

O

A

G  A C R E

D

ST MARTIN’S 
N
O
COURTYARD
1.9 acres

L

COVENT GARDEN

R

E

G

E

N

T STREET

Y

L

D I L

A

C

P I C

GREEN

PARK

E

U

N

E

TESBU RY  A V

CHINATOWN
3.2 acres

AF
H
     S

LEICESTER SQUARE

COLISEUM
S T R
1.0 acre

D

N

A

CHARING CROSS

PICCADILLY CIRCUS

L

L

A

L   M

L

A

P

L

L

A

E   M

H

T

ST JAMES’S 

PARK

OPERA  
QUARTER
0.6 acres

13

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  PORTFOLIO  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Exceptional portfolio in the heart of 
London’s West End

LONDON 
prosperous and growing

 8.6 million 
London’s 
population 
expected to 
reach 10m by 
2036

19.1 million 
overseas visits 
to London in 
2016, expected 
to grow by 3.5% 
p.a. by 2025

One of the world’s principal global 
cities 

London is the largest city in Western Europe and is a leading commercial 
centre. With its unrivalled variety of heritage and cultural attractions, which 
draw huge numbers of domestic and international visitors, it is one of the 
world’s most popular tourist city destinations. Annual overseas visitor 
numbers have grown 25% over the past five years and 2016 saw a record 
19.1 million visits. Current forecasts point to increases of 35% and 21% in 
overseas and domestic overnight visits, respectively, by 2025.

Growing population

The city’s population is currently around 8.6 million, with growth of 16% 
forecast by the mid 2030’s. Additionally, there is a similar, and growing, 
population in southern England within easy commuting or visiting distance. 

Economic resilience

Its global appeal brings long-term prosperity, which gives it a resilient 
economic base, which is not reliant solely on the fortunes of the wider UK 
economy.

14

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  PORTFOLIO  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

THE WEST END
popular destination attracting exceptional footfall and spending

>200 million 
 annual visits 
to the West 
End

c.700,000 
working 
population in 
the City of 
Westminster

>4% of UK GVA 
produced 
within the City 
of Westminster

>200 million 
 passengers  
use the six 
underground 
stations closest 
to our villages

Huge numbers of visitors and large 
working population 

Exceptional and improving 
transport links 

The West End has an unrivalled concentration of entertainment and cultural 
attractions, historic buildings, public spaces, world–class variety of shops 
and a wide choice of innovative and accessible dining and leisure concepts.

Together, these provide an exceptional all-round experience, attracting huge 
numbers of domestic and international visitors. Annual visits are estimated 
at over 200 million. Importantly, it is also a location for a wide range of 
global, national and local businesses, and a popular place to live. The City of 
Westminster generates over 4% of UK economic output and has a working 
population across the borough of almost 700,000. Together with its visitor 
base and its important residential community, this brings high, and growing, 
footfall and spending.

Demand outstrips availability of 
space 

Availability of restaurant, leisure and retail space in the West End is 
constrained, planning regulations are tight and there is demand from a wide 
variety of national and international occupiers. This structural imbalance in 
supply and demand is fundamental to our portfolio’s rental prospects and 
capital value, both of which have shown significantly greater long-term 
growth and stability through economic cycles than the real estate market 
outside this resilient location. 

The West End is at the heart of the capital’s underground and bus network. 
The six underground stations closest to our villages handle over 200 million 
passengers annually. The transport network is critical to the success of the 
West End and infrastructure investment to improve capacity and reliability 
continues. 

We expect to benefit greatly from the Elizabeth Line, which opens in a year’s 
time. Apart from increasing network capacity, it will extend the West End’s 
provincial catchment area and shorten travel times; factors which are 
expected to increase visitor numbers and retail and leisure spending. 
Passenger numbers at the Tottenham Court Road and Bond Street transport 
hubs are forecast to reach over 200 million by the mid-2020s, materially 
changing footfall patterns in the vicinity. All our properties are within ten 
minutes’ walk, and approximately 80% within five minutes, of these two 
West End stations. 

Responding to the expected substantial increase in footfall around the new 
stations and in nearby streets, a number of improvements to the public 
realm are planned, or underway, to ease pavement congestion and provide 
stronger connections between retail, cultural and leisure attractions.

15

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  PORTFOLIO  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Exceptional portfolio in the heart of  
London’s West End
Our destinations

Carnaby
35% OF OUR PORTFOLIO1
£39.7m CURRENT INCOME2
£1.3bn VALUATION

IN NUMBERS

RESTAURANTS,  
CAFÉS AND  
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

APARTMENTS

58

99

97

109,000
sq.ft.

182,000
sq.ft.

244,000
sq.ft.

56,000
sq.ft.

CURRENT INCOME2 BREAKDOWN

16% 49% 28% 7%

Carnaby is a unique, iconic 
shopping and dining destination,  
a few minutes away from both 
Oxford Circus and Piccadilly Circus.  
Attracting an estimated 40 million people each year, it 
is a popular and internationally-renowned destination 
for fashion retail, focussed on flagship stores, new 
concepts and independent brands. It now has a 
growing reputation for lively casual dining and leisure 
choices, centred on Kingly Court and Kingly Street. 
Our ownership, across 14 streets, covers 4.3 acres.

61% of the Group’s office space is in Carnaby. It includes 
our largest floor plates and more modern office buildings.

carnaby.co.uk

16

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  PORTFOLIO  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Covent Garden
32% OF OUR PORTFOLIO1,3 
£37.0m CURRENT INCOME2,3
£1.2bn VALUATION3 

Covent Garden, famous for its 
historic street patterns and 
architecture, is home to half of 
London’s West End theatres. It has 
a broad range of shops, restaurants, 
bars and cafés, giving it a distinctive 
atmosphere appealing to a wide 
range of audiences. There is also a 
flourishing residential community. 
Our wholly-owned holdings, extending to 4.8 acres, 
are principally centred on Seven Dials in north Covent 
Garden, close to Leicester Square and the 
Tottenham Court Road transport hub. They also 
include the Coliseum and Opera Quarter restaurant 
districts, in east and west Covent Garden. Annual 
footfall in Seven Dials alone is estimated at over  
30 million people. 

sevendials.co.uk 
stmartinscourtyard.co.uk

1  By value

2  Annualised, as at 30 September 2017

3  Including our 50% share of the Longmartin joint venture

4  Shaftesbury has a 50% interest in this joint venture

WHOLLY-OWNED IN NUMBERS

RESTAURANTS,  
CAFÉS AND  
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

APARTMENTS

90

95

216

176,000
sq.ft.

143,000
sq.ft.

85,000
sq.ft.

133,000
sq.ft.

CURRENT INCOME2 BREAKDOWN

39% 28% 12% 21%

LONGMARTIN4 IN NUMBERS

RESTAURANTS,  
CAFÉS AND  
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

APARTMENTS

9

22

75

39,000
sq.ft.

73,000
sq.ft.

102,000
sq.ft.

55,000
sq.ft.

CURRENT INCOME2 BREAKDOWN

15% 36% 34% 15%

17

 
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  PORTFOLIO  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Exceptional portfolio in the heart of  
London’s West End 
Our destinations

Chinatown
22% OF OUR PORTFOLIO1
£23.8m CURRENT INCOME2
£0.8bn VALUATION

Soho
7% OF OUR PORTFOLIO1
£8.9m CURRENT INCOME2
£0.3bn VALUATION

Chinatown is at the heart of London’s 
West End entertainment district, 
next to Leicester Square, Piccadilly 
Circus and Shaftesbury Avenue. 
It has an exceptional concentration of restaurants 
which offer a wide range of Chinese and East Asian 
dining choices. The prosperity of this thriving 
destination is underpinned by the large number of 
visitors it attracts throughout the day, and into the 
night, seven days a week, estimated at over 50 
million annually. We are the dominant owner, with 
holdings extending to 3.2 acres.

chinatown.co.uk

Soho is unique in its combination  
of a flourishing day-time business 
community and an important 
evening and night-time economy. 
By day, it offers a wide variety of independent, quirky 
shops and is a hub for creativity with many small 
businesses, typically in the media, tech and fashion 
sectors. In the evening and night-time, its distinctive 
atmosphere and exceptional choice of restaurants, 
cafés, bars and clubs, together with nearby theatres, 
create a popular destination for visitors as well as the 
West End’s large working population. It has a large 
residential community. 

IN NUMBERS

RESTAURANTS,  
CAFÉS AND  
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

APARTMENTS

thisissoho.co.uk

IN NUMBERS

RESTAURANTS,  
CAFÉS AND  
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

APARTMENTS

79

60

130

31

39

68

211,000
sq.ft.

92,000
sq.ft.

28,000
sq.ft.

86,000
sq.ft.

59,000
sq.ft.

43,000
sq.ft.

36,000
sq.ft.

36,000
sq.ft.

CURRENT INCOME2 BREAKDOWN

CURRENT INCOME2 BREAKDOWN

62% 21% 4% 13%

41% 25% 15% 19%

18

Fitzrovia
4% OF OUR PORTFOLIO1
£4.7m CURRENT INCOME2
£0.1bn VALUATION

Fitzrovia is a bustling 
neighbourhood and renowned 
dining district, just north of 
Oxford Street and close to 
Tottenham Court Road. 
Our ownerships extend to 0.8 acres on, or close to, 
Charlotte Street and Goodge Street.

Fitzrovia’s rapidly increasing office concentration, 
dominated by creative, media, fashion and tech 
businesses, together with a large student population, 
add to the cosmopolitan feel of the area.

IN NUMBERS

RESTAURANTS,  
CAFÉS AND  
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

APARTMENTS

24

9

51

50,000
sq.ft.

14,000
sq.ft.

10,000
sq.ft.

25,000
sq.ft.

CURRENT INCOME2 BREAKDOWN

54% 13% 8% 25%

1  By value

2  Annualised, as at 30 September 2017

19

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  PORTFOLIO  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

20

 Focus

on restaurants, 
leisure and retail
Mix of uses, focussed on 
restaurants, leisure and retail 
over lower floors with offices 
and residential on upper floors.

 Restaurants, 
leisure and 
shops generate 
70% of current 
annualised 
income1

Our 1.1 million sq. ft. of restaurant, leisure and retail space 
provides 70% of total current income1. It comprises 282 
restaurants, cafés and pubs and 302 shops, mainly of medium or 
small size. The variety of interesting dining, leisure and retail 
brands gives our destinations a particular identity and provides 
visitors with an experience unmatched by other areas.

EVOLUTION OF USES OVER TIME  
(% OF ANNUALISED CURRENT INCOME¹)

7

23

29

41

Residential

Offices

Restaurants and leisure

Shops

2007               

1  Wholly-owned portfolio

2  EPRA vacancy

13

17

37

33

2017

New concepts and 
independents favoured 

Careful tenant selection is critical to ensure our areas remain 
popular and attract growing footfall. We favour new concepts, 
independent operators and international retailers making their 
UK debut and prefer mid-market, innovative formats. Our shops 
are neither luxury nor value-led and our restaurants typically are 
neither Michelin-starred nor low-end fast food. 

Long history of demand 
exceeding availability 

In the West End, there is a long history of occupier demand for 
restaurant, leisure and retail space exceeding availability, which is 
often restricted by planning policies. 

Consequently, rents for these uses, in our areas, have not 
demonstrated cyclical nor structural decline, even in times of 
major economic uncertainty. Over the past ten years, ERV for 
these uses has demonstrated like-for-like annualised growth of 
3.8%, despite rental levels remaining broadly flat during the global 
financial crisis. Vacancy levels for these uses over the same 
period have averaged 3.0% of ERV1,2. 

LIKE-FOR-LIKE ERV GROWTH¹  
RESTAURANTS, LEISURE AND RETAIL

160

140

120

100

80

10-year CAGR: 3.8%

2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017

    ERV (cumulative, rebased to £100 at 30 September 2007) 

Limited obsolescence

An important aspect of restaurant, leisure and retail 
accommodation is that we provide it in shell form only. Tenants 
are responsible for their fit-out, with no capital contribution 
from us. When tenants vacate, we re-let the shell of space 
without incurring significant refurbishment costs, limiting our 
exposure to obsolescence.

Upper floors - a mix of offices 
and residential

The space above our shops and restaurants comprises small 
offices, residential, or a mix of both. A local working population 
and a residential community are essential elements of the 
character and economy of our areas, bringing added life and 
vibrancy, and providing regular customers for our shops, 
restaurants, cafés, and leisure operators. 

See also pages 42 to 47

21

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

 Creating

distinctive, lively and interesting destinations

Long-term,  
holistic curation 
of our areas

Ownership  
clusters

Improve our 
buildings

Attracting footfall and 
spending

Focussed on long-term sustainable income growth 
and value creation, our portfolio management 
strategy includes curating our vibrant restaurant, 
leisure and retail destinations to: 

•  provide an interesting experience to visitors.

•  appeal to occupiers and residents.

•  attract footfall and spending.

•   drive sustained demand from tenants and  

high occupancy levels.

Fundamental to the strategy is managing the 
long-term restaurant, leisure and retail  
tenant-mix by: 

•  clustering similar uses and brands.

•   managing planning uses to maximise rental  

and capital values.

•   encouraging new formats to ensure our  
villages respond to ever-changing tastes  
and expectations. 

Compounding benefits 
of individual transactions 
across nearby holdings

Growing rents, unlocking 
value, ensuring long-term 
sustainability

Over the years, we have identified well-located 
areas where footfall potential is good but rents 
are initially low, often because they have suffered 
from fragmented ownership, lack of investment, 
and the absence of a coherent strategy for uses 
and tenant mix.

By establishing ownership clusters, we can take a 
long-term holistic view in our investment and 
management strategies. This allows us to unlock 
rental and capital value potential whilst 
compounding the benefits of individual transactions, 
such as improved tenant quality and higher rental 
tones, across our adjacent and nearby holdings. 

We estimate that the average age of our buildings 
is around 150 years. Whilst conservation and listed 
building legislation limits wholescale development 
in our areas, our skill is in bringing long-term 
economic and environmental sustainability to  
our properties. We improve our buildings through 
refurbishment and reconfiguration to enhance 
their rental potential and capital values, and extend 
their useful lives. This involves a combination of:

•   maximising retail, restaurant and leisure space.

•   reconfiguration to provide occupiers with more 

efficient trading space.

•   ensuring they are capable of meeting the needs 

of modern occupiers.

•   maximising environmental performance whilst 
maintaining buildings’ individual characters.

•   converting under-utilised space on upper 
floors to introduce more valuable uses and 
bring long-term economic sustainability to 
buildings as a whole.

Typically, the duration of our schemes is short 
and the costs are modest. Annual capital 
expenditure is normally around 1% of portfolio 
value.

22

Details of the impact of our business on the environment are set out in Sustainability and stakeholders on pages 28 to 33

STRATEGIC REPORT OVERVIEW CREATING DISTINCTIVE, LIVELY AND INTERESTING DESTINATIONS Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Promote  
our destinations 

Invest in  
the public realm 

Forensic  
knowledge of  
the West End

Driving sustained 
occupier demand  
and footfall

Creating safe and 
welcoming areas  
to drive footfall

We identify, promote and contribute to 
public realm improvements in our villages to 
ensure our streetscapes provide a safe and 
welcoming environment for tenants, their 
customers, and residents. In our experience, 
this is an important catalyst for increasing 
footfall. 

We work closely with our tenants to promote 
our areas and their businesses to the West 
End’s wide domestic and international 
audience.

Our multi-channel marketing includes: 

•   widely-publicised initiatives such as 

shopping, street food and music events.

•   an active digital strategy, including dedicated 
websites for our villages, and an extensive 
social media presence.

•   decorating our villages e.g. at Christmas 

and for Chinese New Year.

We build on relationships with our existing 
tenants who are not only a great source of new 
ideas, but also have their own promotional 
and digital strategies which bring further 
footfall to our villages.

We invest considerable resources in promoting 
our areas to potential retail, restaurant and 
leisure operators. This includes active 
engagement with trade press, research visits 
to UK and international cities, and attendance 
at trade events.

Experience through 
economic cycles

Our long-established team’s forensic 
knowledge of the West End and experience of 
management through economic cycles is key 
to implementing our strategy. 

Our executive directors have an average length 
of service of nearly 24 years, and the senior 
executive management team has eleven 
years’ average service. 

Additionally, we are supported by a broad range 
of external advisors, who bring us both ideas 
and their wide experience, gained from other 
clients. Everybody involved with Shaftesbury 
– staff and advisors – shares a passion and 
enthusiasm for the West End and our locations.

Based in Carnaby, we are within fifteen 
minutes’ walk of all our holdings. We maintain 
regular contact with tenants, community groups, 
neighbouring owners and other stakeholders, 
and are able to respond quickly to 
opportunities and issues as they arise. 

As a long-term investor in our areas, we are 
active in working with, and supporting, our local 
community to address issues and challenges 
of mutual interest and concern. Also, we work 
closely with Westminster City Council and 
the London Borough of Camden to achieve 
our shared goal of a safe, lively and prosperous 
West End.  

See pages 68 to 70 for details of our directors and senior management team

23

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW   FOCUS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

24

2525

  How we

 measure success

The principal metrics upon which we focus in running the business, and how 
they align with remuneration, are set out below. These include both long-term 
performance and operational measures, reflecting our long-term strategy.

LONG-TERM PERFORMANCE MEASURES

TOTAL SHAREHOLDER RETURN (TSR)

EPRA NAV1 (COMPOUND ANNUAL GROWTH) 

Objective
Outperform benchmark We have outperformed the benchmark over 

Result

Objective
Outperform RPI plus 3%

each period measured.

Result
We have outperformed the benchmark over 
each period measured. 

229.1%

13.8%

110.4%

66.9%

56.2%

6.5% 5.5%

14.5%

7.9%

10.1%

7.2% 6.9%

  5.2%

5.4%

6.6%

5.8%

1 year

3 years

5 years

10 years

1 year

3 years

5 years

10 years

 Shaftesbury    

  FTSE 350 Real Estate Index

 Shaftesbury    

  RPI plus 3%      

Measures returns to shareholders, taking into account 
share price movements and dividends in the period.

Traditional sector measure of value creation.  

Our performance is benchmarked against an index of other listed real estate 
companies. We outperformed the benchmark over each period measured.  

We benchmark the compound annual growth rate in EPRA NAV against 
a hurdle rate of RPI plus 3%.

Growth over the year to 30 September 2017 of 7.2% was 0.3% above 
the benchmark and is stated after exceptional refinancing costs, which 
reduced EPRA NAV by 20 pence per share. Excluding these exceptional 
costs, our one-year growth was 9.5%, compared with RPI plus 3% of 6.9%. 

Alignment with remuneration: The three-year relative performance for each of these measures is used to calculate vesting awards under the LTIP.

26

See pages 87 and 91 for more information on the LTIP

See page 54 for more information on EPRA NAV

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  HOW WE MEASURE SUCCESS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

OPERATIONAL MEASURES

SUSTAINED RENTAL GROWTH2,3

MAxIMISE OCCUPANCY4

Objective
Achieve growth in ERVs

Result
Commercial lettings/renewals/rent reviews4: 
+6.7% vs ERV at September 2016

Objective
Let vacant space 
quickly 

Result
1.5 months' average letting time3

  106

  100

  80

  78

  92

  84

  78

  81

  86

  60

  63

  68

  145

  139

  128

  119

  110

103

94

  114

6.0%

10 year average: 2.7%

2.9% 2.9%

2.6% 2.8%

2.7%

2.3%

1.4%

2.5%

1.6% 1.6%

2008  2009  2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

2014 

2015 

2016

2017

2008  2009  2010  2011  2012  2013  2014  2015   2016  2017 

  Annualised current income (£m)    

  ERV (£m)

  EPRA vacancy (% of ERV)           Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and Central Cross

Maximises income generated by the portfolio.

Letting space quickly is a KPI. With sustained tenant demand, vacancy levels 
are typically low. Average EPRA vacancy4 over the past ten years has been 
2.7% of ERV. At 30 September 2017, EPRA vacancy was 6.0%, which 
included 3.5% in respect of space recently created at our Thomas Neal’s 
Warehouse and Central Cross schemes.

Sustained growth in contracted and potential rents is 
fundamental to long-term income and value creation. 

Achieving rents above ERV is a KPI. In our leasing activity, we aim to establish 
new rental tones which exceed ERVs assessed by our external valuers. This 
improves our portfolio’s reversionary potential by generating rental evidence 
on individual properties, which is then compounded across our nearby 
holdings. Typically, we crystallise this rental potential into contracted income 
over a three - five year period. Importantly, the level of lease incentives 
granted to tenants remains modest.

Our strategy has delivered sustained growth in annualised current income 
and rental values over many years. The 10-year like-for-like compound annual 
growth rate in annualised current income and ERV of our portfolio has been 
4.9% p.a. and 4.6% p.a. respectively, with growth in current income every year.

The reversion currently stands at £30.4 million, 26.6% above annualised 
current income.

1 An alternative performance measure. See page 140

2 Data includes acquisitions

3  Including our 50% share of property held in joint venture

4 Wholly-owned portfolio

See page 94 for how these measures form part of the bonus for the year ended 30 September 2017

See pages 40 to 41 for more information on vacancy, Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and Central Cross

27

  
 
 Sustainability
and stakeholders

Our strategic goals:
The environmentally sustainable re-use and  
careful management of existing buildings 
 Effective stakeholder engagement 
 Invest in our community
A fair and ethical framework for employees  
and our supply chain

We pride ourselves on our ability to extend the economic 
useful lives of our buildings through changes of use and 
reconfiguration, within the constraints of legislation, so  
that they continue to meet the needs of modern occupiers.  
This emphasis on refurbishment forms the core of our 
sustainability strategy and is measured through an increased 
number of schemes achieving BREEAM* certification.

In an urban location, which is intensively used by huge 
numbers of visitors, a large working population and residential 
community, social issues and challenges are bound to arise. 
We therefore focus on community-related activities which 
help to support organisations that tackle these problems. 

The Wild West End collaboration, which promotes biodiversity, 
continues to gain momentum. Working with other 
neighbouring landowners, we are increasing the number of 
biodiversity features in our areas and on our buildings, with 
the associated benefits which promote health and well-being 
for tenants and visitors. We were delighted to be recognised 
for our work at Carnaby with pollinators as part of the 
Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affair’s Bees’ 
Needs Week. 

In the year ahead we will work together with our stakeholders 
and, in particular, our tenants, to further our sustainability 
objectives. 

See also the full sustainability report on our website.

Management of 
sustainability

A sustainability committee meets quarterly to define objectives, 
agree strategies and review progress. We have a robust and 
effective sustainability policy which is reviewed annually by 
the Board and is available on our website. 

We continue to base our sustainability strategies on the 
core goals: 

Environment: the re-use and careful management of 
existing buildings is inherently sustainable. In addition, 
reducing the running costs of the buildings and improving 
their operational efficiencies is essential to attract tenants, 
as well as meet future regulatory requirements.

Community: engaging with community groups and charities 
to ensure we integrate with our community. 

Stakeholders: engaging with our tenants and investors 
ensures that we are aware of their expectations and can 
respond accordingly. In particular, we work with tenants to 
identify ways in which they can use our buildings more 
efficiently and operate in a more sustainable manner. 

Working closely with our suppliers enables us to control our 
potentially most significant impacts and facilitate better 
standards of service through our supply chain.

Employees: investing in the welfare and development of our 
employees ensures development in their role and 
continuing retention. 

28

*BREEAM Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method 

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  SUSTAINABILITY AND STAKEHOLDERS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Stakeholders

As a long-term business in the West End, we have, over many 
years, created an extensive stakeholder group.

Biodiversit y
holders

e
r
a
h
S

S

u

p

p

l
i
e

r

s

E

n

v

i
r

o

n

m

e

nt

T e nants

Visito r s

Labo

ur
o

n

c

/

e

m

d

it
i

p
l

o

E

o

y

n

m

m

s

e

n

t

p

l

o

y

e

e

s

y
t
ni
u
m

C o m
A ir q uality

During the year, we have focussed our sustainability efforts on 
developing an air quality strategy and supply chain management 
which involves working in partnership with a number of stakeholders.  

As a consequence of our outsourcing model, the effective 
communication of our policies and objectives through our supply 
chain is important to ensure that an ethical and sustainable 
approach is adopted to the employment of labour and the purchase 
of goods and services on our behalf. 

We have developed a Supplier Code of Conduct which has been 
circulated to our principal suppliers for inclusion in contracts. 
We require payment of the London Living Wage and compliance 
with the Modern Slavery Act 2015 throughout our supply chain.

We publish a statement on our website detailing how we are 
tackling slavery and human trafficking in our supply chain. Having 
written to all our principal suppliers to raise awareness of the 
legislation, we have progressed to identifying the higher risk areas 
within our supply chain and are working to raise awareness and 
monitoring processes. 

We have other policies in place which address human rights, 
whistleblowing and the ethical conduct of our business, all of 
which are included within our sustainability policy. The policy  
is updated annually and provided to organisations in our supply 
chain to encourage them to adopt and enforce similar policies  
in their own businesses.

Two important initiatives were introduced during the year to 
implement the air quality strategy:

•   Consolidation of waste collections in Carnaby. This had the 
dual benefit of reducing vehicle movements in the area and 
minimising the number of refuse bags left on the street, 
thereby improving the visual appearance of the area. 

•   A partnership to provide consolidated and managed deliveries 

for tenants and customers in Carnaby. The aim is through 
delivery consolidation of office supplies, there will be fewer 
vehicles in the area and by using a low emission fleet, air 
quality will be improved. 

Environment

We are committed to sustainability by the re-use and careful 
management of existing buildings. We improve and extend the 
economic life of our buildings.

All our portfolio is located in a Conservation Area and around 20% 
of our buildings are listed. Within these constraints, we strive to 
minimise our impact on the environment. 

Building certifications
Our objective is to achieve BREEAM Very Good for all commercial 
refurbishment schemes. Progress has been made over the year 
to extend the coverage to include larger projects, both 
commercial and domestic; six are in progress and are on course 
to achieve at least our target of Very Good. Three other schemes 
are at pre-assessment or planning stage. 

EPCs
We are making good progress against the Government’s Minimum 
Energy Efficiency Standards (MEES). From April 2018, leased areas, 
at the time of letting, will be required to have an Energy Performance 
Certificate (EPC) of grade E or above. Properties where we have 
not got EPCs at, or above, this level have generally been let under 
long-term leases which commenced before MESS requirements for 
EPCs were introduced. They will be scheduled for works, to meet 
or exceed the requirements of MEES, when the leases expire.  

   NUMBER OF LEASES

203

182

1,082

   Unassessed
 F or G grade

   A-E grade

29

  
STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  SUSTAINABILITY AND STAKEHOLDERS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Community

Our engagement and activities are aligned with the community in 
which our portfolio is located. We have a long record of support, 
and close involvement with, local charities and not-for-profit 
organisations which assist with initiatives in these communities. 
Not only are they our neighbours, but their work ensures that the 
West End remains a vibrant and diverse destination, which 
supports residential communities, businesses and cultural 
organisations and which welcomes growing numbers of domestic 
and international visitors. 

We have continued our membership of the London Benchmarking 
Group (LBG). Our contribution is measured in accordance with 
their framework which provides a standard and comparable 
methodology. 

Our LBG contribution equated to £562,000 and is analysed 
opposite. We provide space to charities and other not-for-profit 
organisations on a short-term basis to assist in promoting their 
charity or cause in our areas or provide cost-effective space for 
organisations in our central locations. 

Our Section 106 contributions (an agreement to make a payment 
to a local authority in respect of planning obligations) totalled 
£513,000. These funds are generally for investment in public 
realm works.  

Our total community contribution equated to 2.5% of EPRA 
pre-tax earnings.  

We are establishing a community investment committee to 
oversee the strategic direction and effectiveness of our 
community giving.

HOW WE CONTRIBUTE

  Cash

  In kind contributions

  Management costs

  Employee time

21%

8%

19%

52%

WHAT WE SUPPORT

  Arts/culture

   Education

   Environment

  Health

  Other

  Social welfare

29%

18%

14%

6%

10%

23%

Our key community partners include:

Pride
Provides a platform for London’s LGBT+  
community to raise awareness of LGBT+ 
issues and campaign for the freedoms  
that will allow them to live their lives  
on a genuinely equal footing.
Supported since 2016. 

ENO Community Choir
Provides an opportunity for people from  
all walks of life to come together for the 
joy of singing. 
Supported the choir for over 7 years.

LBG
£562,000

House of St Barnabas
Supports homeless people in London 
back in to work through a City & Guilds 
accredited 12 week employability 
programme. 
We have sponsored one person per 
employability programme since 2015 – 
9 people so far.

Westminster Tea Dance 
(through Sir Simon Milton Foundation) 

The dance hosts 1,000 Westminster 
residents over the age of 65. Part of the 
Silver Sunday national campaign to tackle 
the blight of loneliness that affects so 
many older people. 
We have been a headline sponsor since 2014.

s106
£513,000

The Connection at  
St Martin’s-in-the-Field 
The Connection helps thousands of 
homeless people in Westminster every year 
move away from and stay off the streets of 
London. 
We have sponsored an outreach worker  
since 2012.

Chinese Community  
Centre 
Sponsorship of a part-time advice worker 
who gives advice and support to Chinese 
people about welfare, benefits and housing. 
The Centre’s mission is to preserve and 
promote Chinese culture, arts and identity, 
whilst helping the community to better 
integrate into mainstream UK community.
Supported since 2013.

30

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  SUSTAINABILITY AND STAKEHOLDERS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Employees

Our employees play a vital role in implementing our strategy and 
contributing to its evolution. The culture of the organisation and 
our approach to employee training, development and employment 
conditions has been an important part of our focus this year. 

Diversity is important to ensure that we have a mix of views and 
inputs into our business. This is not limited to gender diversity, 
but includes a wide spectrum of attributes and backgrounds we 
look for when recruiting new employees. We have increased our 
employee numbers by three this year and in the recruitment 
process, we implemented new procedures to ensure that we are 
recruiting from the widest talent pool. 

In the real estate sector, there is a concerted effort to ensure 
gender is at the forefront of diversity initiatives. We are 
committed to gender equality and employee development. This is 
reflected in our membership of both Real Estate Balance and 
the RICS Inclusive Employer Quality Mark. Our gender diversity is 
set out below and in the Nomination Committee report. We have 
been ranked first in the FTSE250 progress for Executive Committee 
and Direct Reports in the Hampton-Alexander review on gender 
diversity. Overall, the Group was ranked 37 in the FTSE250 for 
combined Board and Executive Committee diversity.

Percentage of female employees overall

Percentage of female employees in senior leadership team*

Percentage of female board members

Average training hours per employee

We believe that investing in training and development is essential 
and, this year, employees underwent an average of 16 hours 
training. A number of new training initiatives have been introduced 
including an e-learning training programme. We have also had 
training on unconscious bias, time management and people 
management skills. Employees receive personal development 
reviews and annual appraisals. The Board and employees 
undertook culture workshops to discuss and document the 
corporate values and behaviours. 

14% of employees have taken advantage of the flexible working 
arrangements we offer.   

We recognise the importance of community volunteering from 
both an employee and a community perspective and are now 
introducing volunteering leave.   

There have been no instances of non-compliance with our 
Anti-Bribery Policy during the financial year. 

2017

59%

57%

30%

16

2016

60%

50%

30%

12

Percentage of employees receiving professional development review 

100%

100%

Average length of service (years)

Employee turnover

Absentee rate (EPRA calculation)

Number of employees with flexible working

12

1

0.96

4

12

1

0.75

3

*The like-for-like comparator group changed in 2017 following the creation of the senior leadership team. Therefore the previous year figures are not 
directly comparable. 

See also page 81.  

Real estate balance
An association of real estate leaders with 
the objective to work with both men and 
women in the real estate industry and with 
corporate leaders to achieve a greater 
gender balance at board and executive 
management level across the real estate 
sector.

RICS inclusive employer 
quality mark
Aims to drive behaviour changes by 
encouraging businesses in the real estate 
sector to look carefully at their employment 
practices and to ensure inclusivity is 
embedded in their operations. 

31

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  SUSTAINABILITY AND STAKEHOLDERS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Performance against targets

One of our strategic goals is to work with our stakeholders including tenants, suppliers, employees, agents and the local community throughout our 
operations. This engagement is inherent in our performance against the other three strategic goals, which are set out below:

Strategic goal: 

ENVIRONMENTALLY SUSTAINABLE RE-USE AND MANAGEMENT OF BUILDINGS

Refurbishment schemes above  
£1 million value target BREEAM  
Very Good

Increase the EPC rating of 
properties being refurbished

Source timber from well-managed 
sources, certified by third party 
certification schemes

Work with other stakeholders  
to investigate and promote 
solutions to reduce air pollution  
in the West End

2017 Progress
Focussed on vehicle movements: Launched 
initiative to consolidate deliveries to tenants in 
Carnaby
Working with waste contractors to 
consolidate waste collections in Carnaby

2017 Progress
Six schemes (both commercial and 
residential) on course to achieve a  
minimum of BREEAM Very Good

Future action 2018
Implement air quality strategy
Extend initiatives to other locations

Future action 2018
Continue to target BREEAM and develop 
fit out guide for commercial tenants

2017 Progress
Making progress towards compliance  
with MEES
Of the EPCs assessed, over 80% were  
a grade C or above and all qualifying 
buildings achieved at least an E on 
completion of refurbishment

Future action 2018
Extend the useful life of buildings and 
improve their sustainability by raising the 
EPC rating of properties being refurbished 
according to predetermined targets

2017 Progress
Reuse of timber maximised throughout  
all schemes
Over 95% of timber has been confirmed  
as sustainably sourced with full Chain of 
Custody and 92% using FSC timber

Future action 2018
Continue to maximise the proportion  
of timber that is reused
Source a minimum of 90% of all timber 
from certified sources and ensure all 
timber is purchased from legal sources

Maximise use of landlord procured 
renewable energy and reduce 
energy consumption in 
common parts

2017 Progress
All landlord controlled portfolio sourced 
100% renewable electricity

An increase of 3% for landlord-procured 
electricity, but overall reduction in 
greenhouse gas emissions

Future action 2018
Continue to purchase green electricity where 
costs are within 5% of brown electricity 
Engage with tenants to achieve a year on  
year 3% energy reduction throughout  
the portfolio
Reduce Greenhouse Gas emissions by  
a rolling annual target of 5% from the 2015 
baseline by 2020

Recycle a minimum of 50% of 
tenants’ waste and divert 90% 
from landfill

Improve biodiversity appropriate 
to the Group’s urban location

2017 Progress
57% of tenants’ waste recycled or 
composted in Carnaby and Seven Dials
Green Apple award for Carnaby
Remainder of all waste diverted to landfill
33% recycling achieved at Chinatown in 
first year of reporting

Future action 2018
Continue to engage with tenants to 
improve recycling

2017 Progress
Continued membership of Wild West End 
Increased area covered by 16% from 8,127 
sq. ft. to 9,461 sq. ft.

Developed Biodiversity strategy with five 
year targets

Future action 2018
Continue membership of Wild West End
Implement five year plan to achieve a 50% 
increase of coverage of biodiverse features

32

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  SUSTAINABILITY AND STAKEHOLDERS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Strategic goal: 

INVEST IN OUR COMMUNITY

Support local community groups 
and be proactive in identifying and 
working with charitable and other 
organisations

2017 Progress
Ongoing support of nominated charities

Continue membership of London 
Benchmarking Group

2017 Progress
Contribution to community and stakeholders 
(including Section 106 payments) equates to 
2.5% of EPRA pre-tax earnings

All projects registered with 
Considerate Constructors’  
Scheme achieve a minimum 
score of 30 out of 50

2017 Progress
Average score was 34.8 out of 50

Future action 2018
Create community investment committee  
to set strategic goals for community 
engagement and identify new initiatives

Future action 2018
Continue membership to monitor 
contributions

Future action 2018
Continue to achieve a minimum score  
of 30 out of 50 (above ‘satisfactory’)

Strategic goal: 

FAIR AND ETHICAL FRAMEWORK FOR EMPLOYEES AND SUPPLY CHAIN

Minimise risk of reportable health 
and safety accidents/incidents 
throughout the portfolio

Ensure compliance with  
anti-bribery and corruption policy

Ensure London Living Wage is paid 
through the supply chain, where 
within our control

2017 Progress
No incidents in 2017

2017 Progress
No policy breaches

Future action 2018
Review health and safety policies across  
the portfolio
Aim for no reportable accidents and incidents 
throughout the Group’s activities

Future action 2018
Maintain full compliance; continuing review  
of policies and procedures

2017 Progress
The requirement for the payment of  
London living wage has been included in  
new contracts
Supplier Code issued to all principal  
suppliers

Future action 2018
Ensure adherence to Supplier Code
Aim for accreditation from Living Wage 
Foundation

Review compliance procedures and 
supplier reporting

Invest in training and 
development of our employees. 
Comply with employment 
legislation and best practice 
including diversity
2017 Progress
59% of employees are female. The 
Executive Committee has 57% females. 
The Board has 30% females
Gained Fairplace Award from Ethical 
Property Foundation
Signatory to the RICS Inclusive Employer 
Quality Mark

Future action 2018
Implement an action plan for the RICS 
Inclusive Employer Quality Mark

Continue to monitor diversity within 
the Group

33

Strategic report Annual review

34

Strategic report Annual review

35

Portfolio 

valuation

Strong capital value performance; further increases in 
contracted and prospective rents, expectation of continued 
rental growth, and sustained investor demand for secure assets 
with growth potential in the West End.

PORTFOLIO VALUATION1,4

VALUATION GROWTH1,2,4

ERV GROWTH1,2,4

£3.64bn

7.0%

3.5%

Potential for greater value
Cushman & Wakefield, independent valuer of our wholly-owned 
portfolio, has continued to note that: 

•   our portfolio is unusual in its substantial number of predominantly 
restaurant, leisure and retail properties in adjacent, or adjoining, 
locations in London’s West End; and

•   there is a long record of strong occupier demand for these 
uses in this location and, as a result, high occupancy levels, 
which underpins the long-term prospects for rental growth.

Consequently, they have reiterated to the Board that some 
prospective purchasers may recognise the rare and compelling 
opportunity to acquire, in a single transaction, substantial parts 
of the portfolio, or the portfolio in its entirety. Such parties may 
consider a combination of some, or all, parts of the portfolio to 
have a greater value than currently reflected in the valuation 
included in these financial statements, which has been prepared 
in accordance with RICS guidelines.

Strong valuation performance
At 30 September 2017, the valuation of our portfolio, including our 
50% share of the Longmartin joint venture, increased to £3.64 
billion, following a revaluation surplus for the year of £233.2 million. 
Like-for-like valuation growth was 7.0%, bringing the compound 
annual growth rate over five years to 11.7%. 

This year’s valuation performance reflects sustained occupier 
demand, intensive asset management activity across our portfolio, 
and continued growth in contracted income and rental values. 
Also, it takes into account expectations of further rental growth, 
good occupancy levels, and low capital expenditure. 

Sustained investor demand yet 
limited supply of assets to acquire
During the year, we have seen a sharpening of investor appetite, 
especially for freehold properties in our locations, which offer 
investment security, growing returns and limited exposure to 
obsolescence. This heightening of demand is particularly evident 
for properties close to prime streets, where lower rental levels 
offer better growth prospects.

The equivalent yield attributed by our valuers to our wholly-owned 
portfolio was 3.46%, an eleven basis points reduction over the 
year. The availability of buildings to purchase remains as limited 
as ever, largely because they are typically in long-term private 
ownership and existing owners are reluctant to sell. Consequently, 
when assets do become available, competition is fierce.

In the Longmartin joint venture, ERV reflects the conclusion of 
the first round of rent reviews, following scheme completion in 
2011, where we have seen significant increases in rents. The 
equivalent yield for this geared long leasehold interest was 
broadly unchanged at 3.8%.

1   Including our 50% share of the Longmartin joint venture. See presentation 

of financial information on page 50

2  Like-for-like. See Glossary on page 147 for definition

3  Our 50% share

4  Portfolio excluding non-core asset acquired as part of a portfolio

36

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  PORTFOLIO VALUATION  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

ERV GROWTH1,2,4

3.5%

VILLAGE

Carnaby

Covent Garden

Chinatown

Soho

Fitzrovia

Wholly-owned portfolio

Longmartin joint venture3

Total portfolio1,4

VILLAGE

Carnaby

Covent Garden

Chinatown

Soho

Fitzrovia

Wholly-owned portfolio

Longmartin joint venture3

Total portfolio1

FAIR VALUE
£M

1,265.5

947.2

791.5

272.1

140.2

3,416.5

227.8

3,644.3

% OF 
PORTFOLIO

ANNUALISED  
CURRENT 
INCOME
£M

35%

26%

22%

7%

4%

94%

6%

100%

39.7

28.2

23.8

8.9

4.7

105.3

8.8

114.1

TOPPED-UP
NET INITIAL YIELD
%

EQUIVALENT 
YIELD
%

3.04%

2.76%

2.75%

2.96%

2.93%

2.89%

3.25%

3.56%

3.36%

3.42%

3.49%

3.36%

3.46%

3.80%

ERV
£M

51.2

36.4

30.3

10.7

5.5

134.1

10.4

144.5

2017 VALUATION GROWTH2

5-YEAR CAGR2

 7.1%

 7.5%

 6.0%

 11.3%

 11.4%

 7.5%

 1.0%

 7.0%

 13.5%

 10.5%

 10.1%

 12.6%

 12.0%

 11.7%

 11.2%

 11.7%

See details on how we improve our buildings on page 22

See Portfolio Investment on page 48

37

 
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  PORTFOLIO VALUATION  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Continuing growth in contracted rents and ERVs
Demand for space in our carefully-curated locations has been good throughout the year, which, together with extensive asset management across the 
portfolio, has continued to drive growth in contracted and potential future income. 

At 30 September 2017, annualised current income stood at £114.1 million, following a like-for-like increase of 3.9% during the year. The ERV of our portfolio, 
which is based on current rental tones and largely reflects rental evidence we have established through our leasing transactions, was assessed by our valuers 
at £144.5 million, £30.4 million or 26.6% above current income. Like-for-like ERV growth over the year was 3.5%. 

ANNUALISED CURRENT INCOME1,3 (£M)

ERV1,3 (£M)

4.9

144.5

138.7

1.3

(0.4)

3.5%

109.6

0.5

4.3

114.1

100

100

(0.3)

3.9%

2016

ACQUISITIONS

DISPOSALS

LIKE-FOR-LIKE 
GROWTH2

2017

2016

ACQUISITIONS

DISPOSALS

LIKE-FOR-LIKE 
GROWTH2

2017

The components of the portfolio reversionary potential are shown below. Of the total uncontracted reversion, 67% is accounted for by restaurants, leisure 
and retail. In our locations, these uses have a long history of sustained demand, which, together with a restricted availability of space, underpins their growth 
prospects. We remain confident that, with our proven long-term management strategy, we shall continue to convert this rental potential into cash flow, 
whilst delivering further long-term growth in rental values.

COMPONENTS OF THE REVERSION1,3 (£M) 

145

+26.6% 

9.6

2.4

8.3

10.1

144.5

114.1

100

ANNUALISED  
CURRENT INCOME

CONTRACTED/ 
RENT-FREE PERIODS

EPRA VACANCY

SCHEME VACANCY

UNDER-RENTED LEASES

ERV - BASED ON 
CURRENT RENTAL 
EVIDENCE

How it will be 
realised

On expiry of  
rent-free periods

On letting of space 
available at 30 
September 2017

On completion and 
letting of schemes 
in progress at 30 
September 2017

Through the normal 
cycle of rent reviews, 
lease renewals 
and lettings. This is 
typically converted to 
contracted income  
over a 3 – 5 year 
period

1   Including our 50% share of the Longmartin joint venture.  

See presentation of financial information on page 50

2  Like-for-like. See Glossary on page 147

3  Excluding a non-core asset acquired as part of a portfolio

38

See Leasing and occupancy on page 40

How it will be 

realised

On expiry of  

rent-free periods

On letting of space 

available at 30 

September 2017

On completion and 

letting of schemes 

in progress at 30 

September 2017

Through the normal 

cycle of rent reviews, 

lease renewals 

and lettings. This is 

typically converted to 

contracted income  

over a 3 – 5 year 

period

39

 Leasing  
and occupancy

Sustained demand across our portfolio helped deliver strong leasing results. 
Our Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and Central Cross schemes completed in 
the year and letting is underway.

Leasing 
During the year, we concluded leasing transactions in the wholly-owned 
portfolio with a rental value of £31.1 million (2016: £27.8 million). Of this, 
commercial transactions totalled £23.8 million (2016: £21.6 million) and 
residential lettings and renewals amounted to £7.3 million (2016: £6.2 million). 
Rents for commercial uses were, on average, 6.7% above ERV at 30 
September 2016.

LEASING ACTIVITY DURING THE YEAR1

£M

Commercial 

Lettings and lease renewals 13.4 +7.7% vs September 2016 ERV

Rent reviews

10.4 +22.6% vs previous rent (equivalent  
to 4.2% CAGR over five years)

23.8 +6.7% vs September 2016 ERV

Residential

Lettings and renewals

7.3 -1.6% vs prior rent

Total

31.1

Our share of lettings, lease renewals and rent reviews in the Longmartin joint 
venture was £3.9 million (2016: £2.7 million), with commercial rents achieved 
broadly in line with ERV at 30 September 2016. Accounting for £3.2 million, 
rent reviews delivered average increases of 36.4% compared with previous 
rental levels, an equivalent 5-year CAGR of 6.4%. We have now concluded the 
majority of this first round of rent reviews following scheme completion in 2011. 

EPRA vacancy
At 30 September 2017, EPRA vacancy was 6.0% of ERV, an increase of 4.4% 
over the year. The total includes 3.5% in respect of Thomas Neal’s Warehouse 
and Central Cross. Excluding these larger schemes, EPRA vacancy was 2.5%, 
in-line with our long-term average. 

Completed larger schemes
We have created large, prominent retail and restaurant units at our Thomas 
Neal’s Warehouse and Central Cross schemes, of which 34% by ERV is now 
let or under offer. Larger space requires occupiers to commit to significant 
investment in fit-out and substantial rental obligations and we expect letting 
periods to be longer for these units than for the smaller space typically we have 
to offer. Current macro-economic uncertainties are showing signs of slowing 
potential tenants’ decision–making processes. We will be patient in selecting 
occupiers which meet our objective of delivering long-term rental growth.

Thomas Neal’s Warehouse
In the heart of Seven Dials, our scheme created a unique 22,800 sq. ft. 
flagship retail unit. At 30 September 2017, it accounted for 0.7% of 
available-to-let ERV. The space now is under offer to a single occupier. 

Central Cross
Located at the eastern gateway to Chinatown, next to Leicester Square 
Underground station and a few minutes’ walk from Tottenham Court Road 
station, our scheme is well-positioned to benefit from high and growing 
footfall.  

We have created exceptional, double-height accommodation with five 
shops, totalling 34,500 sq. ft., on Charing Cross Road and seven restaurants, 
fronting Newport Place and Newport Court, extending to 13,300 sq. ft.  

At 30 September 2017, all four of the smaller restaurants (ERV: £0.4 million) 
were let or under offer. Subsequently, we have placed one large restaurant 
under offer (ERV: £0.3 million). We have ongoing discussions with a number 
of parties for the remaining space.

1   Wholly-owned portfolio

40

See also letting activity by use on pages 42 to 47

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  LEASING AND OCCUPANCY  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Other vacancy
Available-to-let vacancy, excluding larger schemes, comprised two cafés 
(ERV: £0.1 million), six shops (ERV: £1.2 million), 13,100 sq. ft. of office space 
(ERV: £0.8 million) and one apartment.  

Space under offer included two restaurants, five shops, 2,100 sq. ft. of 
offices and five apartments.

In the Longmartin joint venture, two shops were available to let. The ERV  
of our 50% share of this space was £0.2 million.

EPRA VACANCY1 AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2017

RESTAURANTS, 
CAFÉS AND 
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

RESIDENTIAL

TOTAL

Larger schemes2

Other vacancy 
-available-to-let

-under offer

£1.4m

£3.4m

-

£0.1m

£0.2m

£1.2m

£0.6m

£0.8m

£0.2m

-

£0.1m

£0.1m

£4.8m

£2.2m

£1.1m

% OF TOTAL  
ERV 
2017

3.5%

1.7%

0.8%

2016

-

0.5%

1.1%

£1.7m

£5.2m

£1.0m

£0.2m

£8.1m

6.0% 1.6%

18,500
sq.ft.

72,000
sq.ft.

15,300
sq.ft.

4,100
sq.ft.

109,900
sq.ft.

31,000
sq.ft.

1   Wholly-owned portfolio

2  Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and Central Cross

41

 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Restaurants, cafés  
and leisure

37% OF  

OUR PORTFOLIO1,2  

282 RESTAURANTS, 

CAFÉS AND PUBS 

605,000 

SQ.FT.

ANNUALISED CURRENT INCOME 
BY VILLAGE2

6%

10%

17%

£38.3m

38%

29%

CARNABY
COVENT GARDEN
CHINATOWN
SOHO
FITZROVIA

10 years

WEIGHTED AVERAGE  
UNEXPIRED LEASE TERM2,3 

3.7% 

EPRA VACANCY2,3 

£10.2m 

LETTINGS / RENT REVIEWS2,4  
(22.1% of restaurant, cafés & leisure ERV)

 19 NEW LETTINGS
  6 LEASE RENEWALS
 44  RENT REVIEWS

42

At 30 September 2017, EPRA vacancy for these uses 
was 3.7%, and included 3.1% in respect of the recently 
completed Central Cross scheme. Other vacancy was 
0.6%, of which 0.4% was under offer. Our ten-year 
average EPRA vacancy for restaurants, cafés and 
leisure is 1.6%.

Newer leases provide us 
with more flexibility

Tenants invest considerable sums fitting out their 
space, sometimes spending the equivalent of 3-5 
years’ rent and, therefore, we grant longer leases 
than for shops, to provide an extended period over 
which occupiers can amortise this cost.

Until recently, leases were granted over whole buildings 
and provided tenants with renewal rights on expiry. 
We find that upper floors often are now under-utilised 
and, where opportunities arise, we seek to negotiate 
the surrender of these leases to secure vacant 
possession. This allows us to improve the configuration 
of space on the lower floors, attract new operators 
on more beneficial terms, and often release valuable 
upper floors for other uses.

Reflecting the strength of demand for our restaurant 
space, in recent years we have reduced the term of 
leases we grant and introduced more flexibility at 
expiry. Also, we include turnover-related rental 
top-ups, giving us the higher of market rent and a 
percentage of annual turnover. This provides a useful 
contribution to both income and earnings. 

Largest provider of dining 
and leisure space in the 
West End
With increasing numbers of visitors to the West End, 
and the widely-recognised growth in interest and 
spending on leisure activities, our 282 restaurants, 
cafés and pubs are important drivers of footfall and 
trading in our locations. We are the largest single 
provider of dining and leisure space in the West End, 
curating high-profile and busy destinations such as 
Chinatown, Kingly Court, Neal’s Yard and the Opera 
Quarter. The majority of our restaurants provide 
casual dining, with a focus on atmosphere, quality 
and experience, increasingly with an all-day offer.

Operators are attracted to the West End as it provides 
access to exceptional daily footfall throughout the 
year, a discerning, affluent customer base of domestic 
and international visitors and a large working population. 
The independent sector is particularly active, reflecting 
the interest from diners to experience high quality, 
creative and accessible new food concepts, often 
then sharing their experiences on social media. 

Demand outstrips 
availability of space
Availability of restaurant and leisure accommodation 
remains constrained by local planning policies, which 
restrict large-scale increases in these uses, whether by 
development, extension of existing space, or conversion 
from other uses. The barriers to entry are high, with 
existing operators reluctant to relinquish their valuable 
sites, other than for significant premiums. Generally, 
tenants ensure they preserve their valuable occupation 
rights and our bad debt history is negligible. 

Demand for the smaller space typically we have  
to offer is healthy, particularly from independent 
operators, established street-food concepts and 
start-ups seeking their first site. 

1  % of annualised current income

2  Wholly-owned portfolio

3  At 30 September 2017

4  Leasing activity during the year ended 30 September 2017

   TYPICAL LEASE TERMS

SHOPS
RESTAURANTS, CAFÉS AND PUBS
Term
OFFICES
Rent reviews
RESIDENTIAL

HISTORICAL LEASES

25 years

Five-yearly, upward-
only

NEW LEASES

15 years

Five-yearly, upward-only

Security of tenure on expiry

Turnover-related top-up

Yes

No

No

Yes

Space leases typically granted over Whole buildings

Operational space only (i.e. not upper floors)

Proportion of our restaurant leases  
(by income)

Incentives

60%

N/A

40%

Short rent-free period to help cover tenant  
fit-out time. No contribution to fit-out costs

   OUR PROGRESS AGAINST 2017 KEY PRIORITIES

KEY PRIORITY

STATUS

Identify further opportunities to 
negotiate vacant possession of 
restaurants let on historical leases.

Negotiated vacant possession of six leases in the year, with a rental 
value of £0.8m.  

Introduce new restaurant  
operators to our destinations.

19 new openings during the year.

Completion of our Central Cross 
scheme and associated public realm 
improvements.

Scheme completed in May 2017.  
50% of restaurant space (by ERV) let or under offer currently. Public 
realm improvements commenced in October 2017.

  2018 KEY PRIORITIES

Complete the letting of restaurant 
space at Central Cross.

Identify further opportunities to 
negotiate vacant possession of 
restaurants let on historical leases.

Introduce new restaurant operators 
to our destinations.

See page 40 for further information on Central Cross

43

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Retail

33% OF  

OUR PORTFOLIO1,2  

ANNUALISED CURRENT INCOME 
BY VILLAGE2

7% 2%

14%

22%

£35.0m

55%

CARNABY
COVENT GARDEN
CHINATOWN
SOHO
FITZROVIA

4 years

WEIGHTED AVERAGE  
UNEXPIRED LEASE TERM2,3 

11.1% 

EPRA VACANCY2,3

£8.1m 

LETTINGS / RENT REVIEWS2,4 
(17.4% of retail ERV)

14  NEW LETTINGS
21  LEASE RENEWALS
21  RENT REVIEWS

44

302 SHOPS 

474,000 SQ.FT.

Contribution to the West 
End as a leading shopping 
destination  
Providing 77% of our current annualised retail 
income, our large clusters of shops in Carnaby and 
Seven Dials make an important contribution to the 
West End’s reputation as a leading global retail 
destination. 

Wide range of shop sizes 
and rents
An important element of the character of our 
destinations is the wide range of shop sizes and 
rental levels across our buildings and streets. 

Of our 302 shops, 209 are small (ERV < £150,000 p.a.), 
providing 37% of our current annualised income, and 
93 are large (63% of current annualised income). This 
allows us to provide a variety of retail formats, from 
start-ups to more established operators, whilst 
offering retailers flexibility to expand or introduce 
new concepts. 

Importantly, rental levels in our high-footfall and spending 
locations are competitive compared with nearby streets 
(see the chart, opposite).

Responding to ever-
changing shopper tastes

The majority of our space is let to fashion and lifestyle 
retailers.

Tenant selection is a key aspect of our strategy to create 
and maintain distinctive retail locations. Shoppers’ 
behaviour is changing rapidly with an emphasis on 
innovation, experience, fulfilment and the ability to 
find something different from that commonly found 
in shopping centres and on high streets. To attract 
visitors, we seek out new, interesting concepts from 
across the world, to maintain a fresh retail mix. 
Additionally, we maintain flexibility in our leasing so 
we are able to respond to shoppers’ ever-changing 
tastes and retailers’ requirements.

Interest remains good
With high footfall, we continue to have good demand 
for space, both from domestic and overseas retailers, 
often opening new concept stores or flagships.  

Despite well-publicised challenges being faced by the 
retail sector, leasing activity during the year has been 
good with lettings, renewals and rent reviews being 
concluded ahead of ERVs assessed by our valuers. 
Importantly, currently we have a number of tenants 
renewing leases early or upsizing, demonstrating their 
confidence in continued profitable trading in our 
locations.

EPRA vacancy at 30 September 2017 was 11.1% of 
retail ERV, of which vacant space at Thomas Neal’s 
Warehouse and Central Cross accounted for 7.2%. Of 
other available space, 1.3% was under offer. Average 
retail vacancy over the past ten years has been 4.3%.

1  % of annualised current income

2  Wholly-owned portfolio

3  At 30 September 2017

4  Leasing activity during the year ended 30 September 2017

5   Source: Cushman & Wakefield, published information and company data

6  Based on 30 ft zones

 
   TYPICAL LEASE TERMS

   WEST END RETAIL RENTAL TONES5 (PRIME ZONE A PER SQ.FT.)

2,200

Our retail leases generally are short, 
giving us the opportunity to refresh 
tenant mix: 

Smaller shops: 3-5 years

Larger shops: 5-10 years

Short rent-free period to help cover 
tenant fit-out periods.

1,400

SHOPS
RESTAURANTS, CAFÉS AND PUBS
OFFICES
RESIDENTIAL

1,100

800

730

650

525

400

360

  Shaftesbury streets

285

240

220

190

165

Old B ond Street6  
Ja m es Street W C 2

O xford Street6

Regent Street6

 M arket  
C ovent G arden 
C arnaby Street
Long Acre

Foubert's Place
N eal Street

M on m outh Street
Floral Street

N e w burgh Street

Earlha m Street

Berwick Street

   OUR PROGRESS AGAINST 2017 KEY PRIORITIES

KEY PRIORITY

STATUS

Completion of our Thomas Neal’s 
Warehouse and Charing Cross Road 
schemes.

Thomas Neal’s Warehouse completed in October 2016 and now 
is under offer.  

Central Cross completed in May 2017. Marketing continues. 

Introduce further interesting retail 
concepts to our destinations.

14 new openings during the year.

  2018 KEY PRIORITIES

Letting retail space at Central Cross.

Continue to introduce interesting 
retail concepts to our destinations.

 See page 40 for further information on Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and Central Cross 

45

 
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Offices

17% OF  

OUR PORTFOLIO1,2  

ANNUALISED CURRENT INCOME 
BY VILLAGE2

8% 2%

6%

20%

£17.5m

64%

CARNABY
COVENT GARDEN
CHINATOWN
SOHO
FITZROVIA

4 years

WEIGHTED AVERAGE  
UNEXPIRED LEASE TERM2,3 

4.0% 

EPRA VACANCY2,3

£5.5m 

LETTINGS / RENT REVIEWS2,4  
(22.1% of office ERV)

 29 NEW LETTINGS
 30  LEASE RENEWALS
  4  RENT REVIEWS

46

403,000 SQ.FT.

Large provider of small, 
flexible office space
With 403,000 sq. ft. of office space, let to 243 
tenants, we are an important provider of small office 
accommodation in the core West End. Our average 
letting is 1,380 sq. ft. at £55 per sq. ft. (2016: £51 per 
sq. ft.) and average ERV is £61 per sq. ft. (2016: £61 
per sq. ft.).

Whilst we already provide flexible terms and space, 
we are working to ensure we remain competitive with 
other SME space providers.

Limited availability of space
Demand for our office space remains good, particularly 
from the media, creative and tech sectors, which often 
find their natural home in Soho and Covent Garden. 

Availability of smaller office space remains low across 
our locations. Whilst we have seen a modest increase 
in lease incentive packages during the year, occupancy 
levels have been high. Retention rates have been 
good, with 30 leases being renewed. 

Office vacancy at 30 September 2017 was 4.0% 
of total office ERV. 

   TYPICAL LEASE TERMS

Smaller offices: 3-5 years

Larger offices: 5-10 years, with break options at year 5

Incentives: Short rent-free period. No contribution to fit-out costs

   OUR PROGRESS AGAINST 2017 KEY PRIORITIES

  2018 KEY PRIORITIES

KEY PRIORITY

STATUS

Schemes extending to 62,400 sq. 
ft. completed or underway at 30 
September 2017.

Continue reconfiguring/
upgrading our office space 
to ensure it meets modern, 
flexible working space 
standards and to improve  
its environmental 
performance to minimise 
occupation costs.

Progress our 57 Broadwick 
Street redevelopment. 

The scheme is on track to complete 
in early 2018. Marketing of the office 
space has commenced.

Maintain strong cash flows 
through high occupancy.

Complete our 57 Broadwick 
Street redevelopment.

Further office upgrades to 
meet modern, flexible space 
standards.

1  % of annualised current income

2  Wholly-owned portfolio

3 At 30 September 2017

4  Leasing activity during the year ended  
  30 September 2017

See page 49 for further information on the 57 Broadwick Street scheme

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Residential

13% OF  

OUR PORTFOLIO1,2  

ANNUALISED CURRENT INCOME 
BY VILLAGE2

8%

18%

12%

£14.5m

22%

40%

CARNABY
COVENT GARDEN
CHINATOWN
SOHO
FITZROVIA

1.2% 

EPRA VACANCY2,3 

£7.3m 

LETTINGS / RENT REVIEWS2,4  
(44.5% of residential ERV)

208 NEW LETTINGS
53 
9 

RENT REVIEWS

LEASE RENEWALS

562 APARTMENTS 336,000 SQ.FT.

Popular area to live
The West End is a popular place to live and we continue 
to see sustained demand to rent our mid-market 
apartments. Our flats are mainly studios and one or two- 
bedroom apartments, many of which have been created 
from the conversion of small office accommodation 
back to its original residential use. We have a number 
of further planning consents for residential conversion, 
which we could implement in the future.

Preference to lease, not sell, 
our apartments
Most of the value of our buildings is in the commercial 
uses on the lower floors. We prefer to lease, rather 
than sell, our apartments in order to retain control 
over whole buildings to realise the long-term potential 
in those valuable lower floors. During the year, we 
identified, and sold, nine apartments which we considered 
did not compromise long-term management flexibility.

High occupancy and 
reliable cash flow
Demand for our mid-market apartments remains good, 
resulting in high occupancy levels and a stable cash 
flow. Normally, we have less than ten apartments 
available at any one time. At 30 September 2017 we 
had six apartments available, of which five were 
under offer.

During the year, we have seen a slight softening in rental 
levels, owing to increased availability of newly-built 
buy-to-let flats across central London. We continue 
our rolling programme to upgrade our apartments, in 
order to ensure their specification remains competitive 
and maintain our high occupancy rates.

   TYPICAL LEASE TERMS

Three year Assured Shorthold Tenancies

Let unfurnished

Annual RPI uplifts

Mutual break options on a rolling two-month  
basis after the first six months

   OUR PROGRESS AGAINST 2017 KEY PRIORITIES

KEY PRIORITY

STATUS

Continue our rolling 
refurbishment 
programme to upgrade 
our apartments and 
improve their rental 
prospects.

Refurbishment works on 79 apartments 
during the year, of which 40 were 
ongoing at year end.

Identify future potential 
residential conversions.

Planning consents granted to create 23 
apartments.

  2018 KEY PRIORITIES

Continue our rolling 
refurbishment programme 
to upgrade our apartments 
and improve their rental 
prospects.

Identify future potential 
residential conversions.

Maintain strong cash flow 
through high occupancy.

1  % of annualised current income

2  Wholly-owned portfolio

3 At 30 September 2017

4  Leasing activity during the year ended  
  30 September 2017

See page 53 for disposals during the year

47

 
Portfolio

investment

Considerable activity continues, adding to income, increasing rental 
tones and unlocking value. Important acquisitions secured during the 
year.

CAPITAL EXPENDITURE

SPACE UNDER REFURBISHMENT DURING THE YEAR

£40.3m

249,400sq.ft.

Investing across our portfolio 
Continuing the trend over recent years, high levels of asset 
management and refurbishment activity continue across our 
portfolio, improving our buildings, increasing income and rental 
potential, and unlocking value. 

Capital expenditure during the year totalled £40.3 million, representing 
1.29% of wholly-owned portfolio value, with schemes extending to 
249,400 sq. ft. (13.7% of wholly-owned floor space). This included 
£14.5 million in respect of our three larger schemes: Thomas Neal’s 
Warehouse, Central Cross and 57 Broadwick Street.

During the year, we secured 62 planning consents, an important part 
of maintaining a pipeline of projects. At year end, we had 22 planning 
applications awaiting decision.

We continue to identify opportunities to implement further asset 
management initiatives. This often involves negotiations to secure 
vacant possession of space to enable us to accelerate the 
implementation of our ideas.

Projects in hand at year end
At 30 September 2017, we had schemes extending to 124,000 sq. ft. and 
representing 6.6% of ERV, down from 11.0% a year ago. This decrease 
was largely due to the completion of our Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and 
Central Cross schemes. 

VACANT SPACE1 HELD FOR, OR UNDER, REFURBISHMENT AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2017

RESTAURANTS, 
CAFÉS AND 
LEISURE

SHOPS

OFFICES

RESIDENTIAL

TOTAL

Larger 
schemes2

Other 
schemes

£0.4m

£0.6m

£1.2m

£0.1m

£2.3m

£1.5m

£1.9m

£2.1m

£1.1m

£6.6m

% OF TOTAL  
ERV 
2017

1.7%

4.9%

2016

5.7%

5.3%

£1.9m

£2.5m

£3.3m

£1.2m

£8.9m

6.6% 11.0%

20,800
sq.ft.

31,200
sq.ft.

47,300
sq.ft.

24,700
sq.ft.

124,000
sq.ft.

202,000
sq.ft.

1  Wholly-owned portfolio

2   2017: 57 Broadwick Street, Carnaby. 2016: Central Cross,  

Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and 57 Broadwick Street

48

For details on Thomas Neal’s Warehouse and Central Cross see page 40

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
 
      
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  PORTFOLIO INVESTMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

57 Broadwick Street, Carnaby
Construction at our mixed-use project at 57 Broadwick Street, at the 
eastern entrance to Carnaby, is progressing well. Located within a few 
minutes’ walk of the new western entrance to Tottenham Court Road 
station, on Dean Street, the scheme will provide: 

•   11,800 sq. ft. of flagship retail and restaurant space over the lower floors;

•   15,000 sq. ft. of new grade A office accommodation across the upper 

floors; and 

•   two apartments totalling 1,900 sq. ft. 

The scheme is expected to cost £14.9 million, of which £10.2 million had 
been incurred by 30 September 2017. Construction of the retail and 
restaurant accommodation (ERV: £1.0 million) has now completed and the 
space either is let or under offer. Marketing of the office accommodation, 
which is planned to complete early in 2018, has commenced. 

Other schemes
During the year, schemes with an ERV of £4.6 million completed and are 
largely now income-producing. New schemes, with an ERV of £4.1 million, 
commenced. 

We had 47 schemes underway at 30 September 2017, extending to 95,300 
sq. ft. and representing 4.9% of ERV. These included 17,600 sq. ft. of 
restaurants and cafés (ERV: £1.5 million), 22,500 sq. ft. of shops (ERV: £1.9 
million), 32,300 sq. ft. of office space (ERV: £2.1 million), and 38 apartments 
either being created or up-graded (ERV: £1.1 million). Of this, space with an 
ERV of £0.9 million was under offer.

In the Longmartin joint venture, our share of capital expenditure during the 
year was £1.2 million. At 30 September 2017, the ERV of our 50% share of 
space held for refurbishment was £0.7 million. This includes the 
redevelopment of the prominent 13,000 sq. ft. mixed-use building on the 
corner of Long Acre and Upper St Martin’s Lane. Expected to complete in 
late 2018, our share of the cost of this scheme is expected to be £4.6 million.

SCHEME VACANCY1 (% of ERV)

5.7%

1.7%

2.0% 1.9%

3.6% 3.9%

0.9%

1.9%

1.3%

2.9%

5.3% 4.9%

1.6% 1.5%

2.3%

1.2%

2008 

2009 

2010 

2011 

2012 

2013 

2014 

2015 

2016 

2017 

  Larger schemes     

  Other schemes 

Improving the public realm
Improving the public realm is a key part of our management strategy.

Public realm improvements both to Cambridge Circus and the western 
section of Earlham Street are now close to completion. We expect that 
these schemes, together with the opening of the Elizabeth Line, will, over 
time, materially improve footfall throughout Seven Dials, bringing benefits 
particularly to those streets where rental values are currently materially 
below their long-term potential.

At our Central Cross holding, Westminster City Council’s improvement 
scheme for Newport Place and Newport Court, which we are funding, has 
commenced recently. It is scheduled for completion in phases from spring 
2018. This new public space will be traffic-free each day, other than for 
servicing between 7am and noon, providing the opportunity, subject to 
planning and licensing approvals, for al fresco dining. 

As part of the plans to improve pedestrian capacity, in advance of the 
opening of the Elizabeth Line, Westminster City Council have designated 
Broadwick Street as a priority pedestrian route. There have already been 
improvements to the public realm at the eastern end of the street and we 
are now working with the City Council on plans to improve the streetscape 
around 57 Broadwick Street and the eastern entrance to Carnaby.

Acquisitions with good rental growth 
prospects

£37.1m

ACQUISITIONS

During the year, we acquired seven properties at a total cost of £37.1 million. 
These comprised four restaurants, two shops, one pub and 3,700 sq. ft. of 
office space, of which 2,300 sq. ft. has planning consent for residential use. 
Three of these buildings were acquired with vacant possession. Through 
short and medium-term asset management initiatives, these additions each 
offer the potential for good rental and capital growth, either individually or 
in combination with our existing ownerships. 

We continue to identify and investigate opportunities to acquire assets in, 
and around, our areas, which offer the opportunity for future rental growth. 

90-104 Berwick Street 
In August 2017, we entered in to a contract to forward purchase a long-
leasehold interest in 90-104 Berwick Street, Soho, at a price of £38.5 million.

Located at the southern end of Berwick Street, the property is currently 
being redeveloped to provide 12,500 sq. ft of retail, a 5,500 sq. ft. 
supermarket, a 2,000 sq. ft. restaurant and a 110-bedroom hotel. Both the 
hotel and supermarket have been pre-let. The redevelopment is expected 
to complete in late 2018, which will, subject to satisfying various contractual 
conditions, trigger the completion of the acquisition.

This strategic acquisition increases our ownership of Berwick Street 
frontages to 50%. Once completed, it will enable us to accelerate our 
long-term strategy on this important north-south route in the heart of 
Soho, which we consider to have good medium to long-term prospects. We 
expect Berwick Street, which is currently in the final phase of major public 
realm improvements, to benefit from a significant increase in footfall from 
the opening of the Elizabeth Line and Tottenham Court Road’s new ticket 
hall on Dean Street in December 2018.

See how improving our buildings and investing in public realm forms part of our management strategy on pages 22 to 23

49

      
Financial 
results

REPORTED RESULTS
NET ASSET VALUE PER SHARE1

EPRA RESULTS1
EPRA NAV

£9.49
+10.7% 

£9.52
+7.2% 

NET PROPERTY INCOME

NAV RETURN

£88.3m
+5.0%

+8.9%

BASIC EPS

EPRA EARNINGS

108.1p
+203.7% 

£45.2m
+15.9% 

DIVIDENDS PER SHARE

EPRA EPS

16.0p
+8.8%  

16.2p
+15.7% 

This year’s results show further 
growth in income, earnings and 
dividends, resulting from continued 
crystallisation of our portfolio’s 
reversionary potential and the 
benefit of lower financing costs. 
Net asset value growth was driven 
by a strong portfolio valuation 
performance.  

Presentation of financial information
Our property portfolio is a combination of properties which are 
wholly owned by the Group and a 50% share of property held in 
joint venture.

The financial statements, prepared under IFRS, includes the Group’s 
interest in its joint venture as one-line items in the Income Statement 
and Balance Sheet. The analysis below is based on the IFRS financial 
statements.

Internally, management consider the valuation of properties and our 
debt position on a proportionally consolidated basis, including our 
50% share of the joint venture. Consequently, the analysis of the 
valuation on pages 36 to 38 and the finance review on pages 56 to 57 
are presented on this proportionally consolidated basis.

We consider that this presentation better explains to stakeholders the 
Group’s activities and financial position. Measures presented on a 
proportional consolidation basis are alternative performance measures 
as they are not defined under IFRS. Further details are set out on 
page 140.

Income statement

Net property income

Administrative expenses 

Valuation gains2

Operating profit

Net finance costs

2017
£M

2016
£M

88.3

84.1

(14.1)

(14.1)

231.7

108.3

305.9

178.3

(32.7)

(33.6)

Debt and interest rate swaps fair value movements3 22.0

(64.1)

Share of Longmartin post-tax results

Profit before tax

Tax

Reported earnings for the year

Basic earnings per share

6.4

301.6

18.5

99.1

-

-

301.6

99.1

108.1

35.6p

50

See Alternative Performance Measures on page 140

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  FINANCIAL RESULTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Reported earnings
Profit after tax for the year amounted to £301.6 million (2016: £99.1 million). 
Basic earnings per share increased to 108.1p (2016: 35.6p), largely due to:

•   the portfolio revaluation surplus, which contributed 82.7p (2016: 38.9p).
•   net property income which added 31.7p (2016: 30.2p).
•   the decrease in the fair value deficit of our interest rate swaps added 7.9p, 
compared with an increase in this deficit, which reduced earnings per 
share by 12.5p last year. 

•   net finance costs, excluding fair value movements, reduced earnings per 

share by 11.7p (2016: 12.1p).

•   a decrease in our share of the post-tax profits from our joint venture, 

which contributed 2.3p (2016: 6.6p), largely driven by a lower revaluation 
surplus.

Additionally, last year’s earnings per share were reduced by 10.5p as a result 
of a one-off charge to recognise the fair value of our 8.5% Debenture Stock.

EPRA earnings1
As is usual practice in our sector, we produce alternative measures for 
certain indicators, including earnings, making adjustments set out by EPRA in 
its Best Practice and Policy Recommendations. EPRA earnings are a 
measure of the level of underlying operating results and an indication of the 
extent to which current dividend payments are supported by recurring 
earnings. In our case, EPRA earnings exclude valuation movements in 
respect of our properties and interest rate swaps, profits on disposal of 
investment properties and deferred tax arising in our Longmartin joint 
venture. In 2016, it also excluded the charge for recognising the fair value of 
our Debenture Stock. EPRA earnings are reconciled below.

IFRS profit after tax

Adjusted for:

2017
£M

301.6

2016
£M

99.1

  Change in value of investment properties 

(230.6)

(108.3)

  Change in fair value of financial derivatives 

Profit on disposal of investment properties

Recognition of fair value of Debenture Stock

Adjustments in respect of the Longmartin joint 
venture:

  Change in value of investment properties 

  Deferred tax

EPRA earnings

EPRA EPS

(22.0)

(1.1)

-

(2.6)

(0.1)

45.2

16.2p

34.9

-

29.2

(11.3)

(4.6)

39.0

14.0p

EPRA earnings increased by 15.9% to £45.2 million (2016: £39.0 million) and 
EPRA EPS grew 15.7% to 16.2p (2016: 14.0p). This increase was principally 
driven by growth in net property income as we continue to capture our 
portfolio’s reversionary potential, lower finance costs following our 
refinancing in October 2016 (see page 56), and increased profits from our 
Longmartin joint venture, having concluded a number of rent reviews during 
the year.

EPRA EARNINGS (£M)

4.2

0.9

1.1

45.2

39.0

20

2016

NET  
PROPERTY 
INCOME

FINANCE  
COSTS 

LONGMARTIN

2017

Net property income
Rents receivable increased by £5.0 million to £103.4 million (2016: £98.4 
million). Like-for-like growth was 5.0%, as we continue to convert our 
portfolio’s reversionary potential into contracted cash flow. Acquisitions 
contributed £1.3 million to the increase, whilst vacancy arising from our 
larger schemes and disposals reduced rents receivable compared with last 
year by £0.8 million and £0.2 million, respectively.

Irrecoverable property charges were £15.1 million (2016: £14.3 million), 
representing 14.6% of rents receivable (2016: 14.5%). After these costs, net 
property income was £88.3 million, up 5.0% (2016: £84.1 million).

RENTS RECEIVABLE (£M)

98.4

1.3

(0.2)

(0.8)

4.7

103.4

70

2016

ACQUISITIONS DISPOSALS

LARGER 
SCHEME 
VACANCY
(YoY impact)

LIKE-FOR-
LIKE
GROWTH 

2017

Administrative expenses
Administrative expenses totalled £14.1 million (2016: £14.1 million). This included 
charges for annual bonuses of £2.7 million (2016: £3.0 million) and share 
options of £1.8 million (2016: £2.5 million). Administrative costs, excluding 
these charges, increased by £1.0 million to £9.6 million (2016: £8.6 million), 
reflecting growing activity within our business, increased employment costs 
and additional headcount. We do not capitalise administrative costs.

1  An alternative performance measure (“APM”). See page 140

2  Profit on disposal and surplus on revaluation of investment properties

3    Change in fair value of interest rate swaps and, in 2016, recognition of fair value of 

Debenture Stock

See Financial management on pages 56 to 57

51

Net property income

Administrative expenses 

Valuation gains2

Operating profit

Net finance costs

Share of Longmartin post-tax results

Profit before tax

Tax

Reported earnings for the year

Basic earnings per share

2017

£M

2016

£M

88.3

84.1

(14.1)

(14.1)

231.7

108.3

305.9

178.3

(32.7)

(33.6)

6.4

301.6

18.5

99.1

-

-

301.6

99.1

108.1

35.6p

Debt and interest rate swaps fair value movements3 22.0

(64.1)

 
52

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  FINANCIAL RESULTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Valuation gains and disposal profits
The surplus arising on the revaluation of our wholly-owned portfolio amounted 
to £230.6 million (2016: £108.3 million). This represented a like-for-like 
increase of 7.5%, principally driven by like-for-like ERV growth of 3.4%, 
together with yield compression of 11 basis points. Further details are 
provided on pages 36 to 38.

Disposals of non-core assets in the period totalled £13.8 million, 12.6% above 
book value at 30 September 2016. These included nine apartments, a small 
mixed-use building in Covent Garden and 1,500 sq. ft. of ancillary commercial 
basement space, which was sold to an adjoining owner. After costs, these 
disposals generated a profit in the year of £1.1 million. 

Net finance costs
Net finance costs (excluding the change in fair value of interest rate swaps) 
decreased by £0.9 million to £32.7 million (2016: £33.6 million) largely as a 
result of the benefits of reduced borrowing costs following our refinancing 
in October 2016. This was partly offset by:
•   higher net debt as a result of acquisitions and further investment in our 

portfolio; and

•   an accelerated write-off of unamortised deferred loan issue costs of 

£0.3 million, following our refinancing in September 2017.

Debt and interest rate swaps fair value 
movements
Following increases in long-term interest rates during the year, the fair value 
deficit in respect of our interest rate swaps decreased, leading to a credit to 
the Income Statement of £22.0 million. We have now terminated these 
swap contracts. 

Share of Longmartin post-tax results
Our share of post-tax profit from the Longmartin joint venture decreased by 
£12.1 million to £6.4 million (2016: £18.5 million), largely due to a lower revaluation 
surplus of £2.6 million (2016: £11.3 million). Our share of net property income 
increased by £1.3 million, following the successful conclusion of a number of 
rent reviews which contributed to a like-for-like increase in rents receivable 
of 17.2%. 

Tax
As a REIT, the Group’s activities are largely exempt from corporation tax and, 
as a result, there is no tax charge in the year (2016: £Nil). 

In common with most businesses, we do collect and pay other taxes and levies 
e.g. payroll taxes, VAT, Stamp Duty Land Tax, Business Rates, and withholding 
tax on Property Income Distributions. During the year, the total amount paid 
in respect of these taxes amounted to £18.1 million (2016: £22.2 million). In 
addition, our share of corporation tax incurred by the Longmartin joint 
venture was £0.9 million (2016: £0.6 million).

The Group’s tax strategy is to account for tax on an accurate and timely 
basis. Our appetite for tax risk is low and we structure our affairs based on 
sound commercial principles, rather than engaging in aggressive tax planning. 
We maintain an open dialogue with HMRC with a view to identifying and 
solving issues promptly. HMRC have designated us as a ‘low risk’ taxpayer, 
a status we aim to maintain. Our detailed tax strategy is available on 
our website.

Dividends
As a REIT, we are required to distribute a minimum of 90% of qualifying REIT 
income, calculated by reference to tax rather than accounting rules, as a 
PID. This is treated as income for investors, and is taxed according to their 
own tax status. PIDs are subject to withholding tax at basic rate income tax, 
except for certain classes of investors who can register to receive their 
distributions gross, rather than net.

Notwithstanding this distribution requirement, our dividend policy is to maintain 
steady growth in dividends, reflecting the long-term trend in our income and 
EPRA earnings, adjusted to add back the non-cash accounting charge for 
equity-settled remuneration. To the extent that dividends exceed the amount 
available to distribute as a PID, we pay the balance as ordinary dividends. 

The Board has recommended a final dividend of 8.1p per share, up 7.3% on 
last year’s final dividend (7.55p per share). Together with the interim dividend 
of 7.9p per share, this brings the total for the year to 16.0p per share, an 
increase of 8.8% on 2016 (14.7p per share).  

This increase reflects growth in net property income and earnings 
enhancements from the refinancing reported last year and is covered 1.01 
times by EPRA earnings per share and 1.04 times by adjusted earnings per 
share1, after adding back the non-cash accounting share option charge of 
£1.4 million. 

If approved at the 2018 AGM, the final dividend will be paid on 16 February 
2018. The exceptional charges associated with our refinancing activities 
during the year are charged against our current year qualifying REIT income. 
Since these charges outweigh qualifying income in the year, the final dividend 
will be paid as an ordinary dividend. It is likely that PID distributions will 
resume in 2018.

The Board monitors the Group’s ability to pay dividends out of available 
resources and distributable reserves. Prospective dividend payments are 
estimated in our forecasts, which also take into consideration future 
liquidity requirements. 

At 30 September 2017, we had distributable reserves of £218.0 million. It is our 
policy, where possible, for subsidiary companies to distribute the majority of 
their distributable profits to Shaftesbury PLC annually. Currently, there are 
no restrictions on subsidiaries’ ability to distribute profits.

DIVIDENDS VS EARNINGS (PENCE PER SHARE)

Dividends 5-year CAGR: 5.9%

2.5

4.8

5.05

12.9

13.2

13.75

13.9

14.7

10.0

8.3

9.65

16.7

16.0

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

  PID         

  Ordinary dividend        

  Adjusted EPS1

 See Portfolio valuation on page 36

See Financial management on pages 56 to 57

1    EPRA EPS, adjusted to add back the non-cash accounting charge for equity-settled 

remuneration. This is an alternative performance measure. See page 140

53

 
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  FINANCIAL RESULTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Balance Sheet

Investment properties

Investment in joint venture

Net debt

Fair value of financial instruments

Other net assets/(liabilities)

Net assets

Net asset value per share1

2017
£M

2016
£M

EPRA NAV1

2017
£M

2016
£M

3,407.3

3,111.6

IFRS net assets

2,646.9

2,387.1

148.0

(914.2)

-

5.8

146.4

(752.1)

(114.1)

(4.7)

2,646.9

2,387.1

£9.49

£8.57

Effect of exercise of options

0.5

0.5

Diluted net assets

Adjusted for:

2,647.4

2,387.6

- Fair value of financial instruments

-

76.1

Adjustment in respect of the Longmartin 
joint venture:

- Deferred tax

EPRA NAV

EPRA NAV per share

EPRA NAV growth

Net asset value return1

17.9

18.0

2,665.3

2,481.7

£9.52

7.2%

8.9%

£8.88

2.2%

3.8%

Cash flows and net debt
Net debt increased by £162.1 million to £914.2 million (2016: £752.1 million). 
The major cash flows were:
•  Operating cash inflow totalling £44.0 million.
•  Dividends paid amounting to £44.5 million.
•  Net capital investment in our portfolio of £68.2 million.
•  Termination of interest rate swaps at a cost of £92.1 million. 

NET DEBT1 (£M)

1.3

92.1

68.2

914.2

(44.0)

44.5

752.1

600

2016

DIVIDENDS

OPERATING  
CASH 
INFLOW

NET  
PORTFOLIO 
INVESTMENT

SWAP 
CANCEL-
LATION

OTHER

2017

Net asset value per share1
Net asset value per share increased by 10.7% to £9.49 (2016: £8.57), largely due 
to the revaluation surplus on our investment properties, which contributed 82p. 
Operating profit, excluding the revaluation surplus, added 27p. Net finance 
costs reduced net asset value per share by 4p, after a credit for the decrease 
in the fair value deficit attributable to our interest rate swaps, prior to their 
termination in September 2017, of 8p. Our share of the Longmartin joint 
venture contributed 2p and dividends paid during the year totalled 15.45p.

EPRA NAV1
EPRA NAV is a sector-recognised benchmark, which makes adjustments to 
reported NAV to provide a measure of the fair value of net assets on a long-term 
basis. Assets and liabilities which are not expected to crystallise in normal 
circumstances are excluded. In our case, the calculation excludes deferred 
tax related to property valuation surpluses in the Longmartin joint venture 
and the fair value of interest rate swaps. Having terminated our remaining 
interest rate swaps during the year, there is now no adjustment to EPRA NAV 
in respect of these.

EPRA NAV per share increased by 64p (7.2%) to £9.52 (2016: £8.88). EPRA 
earnings of 16.2p per share were offset largely by dividends paid in the year 
(15.45p per share). The revaluation surpluses from the wholly-owned portfolio 
and the Longmartin joint venture added 83p. The cancellation of our remaining 
interest rate swaps reduced EPRA NAV by 20p. Growth over the year, 
excluding these exceptional refinancing costs, was 9.5%.  

Net asset value return1 measures shareholder value creation, taking into 
account the growth in EPRA NAV together with dividends paid in the period. 
Net asset value return in 2017 was 8.9% (2016: 3.8%). 

EPRA NAV1 (PENCE PER SHARE)

(20)

83

16

(15)

952

850

888

2016

EPRA  
EARNINGS

DIVIDENDS

REVALUATION 

SWAP 
CANCELLATION

2017

1  An Alternative Performance Measure (“APM”). See page 140
54

55

Financial 
management

Important refinancing activity has increased our financial  
resources, diversified our sources of finance, and significantly  
reduced financing costs.

Sources of capital
Under REIT rules, we are required to distribute the majority of our recurring 
earnings. Furthermore, the importance of our ownership clusters in long-term 
value creation means that opportunities to recycle capital are limited.

Therefore, investment in our portfolio is funded through a combination of 
equity and debt, with equity providing the permanent capital to support our 
long-term strategy. We use debt to enhance, not drive, returns.

Low-risk debt structure
Consistent with the long-term nature of our portfolio and secure income 
streams, our core debt finance is provided by long-term arrangements with 
covenant structures which do not restrict the active management of our 
assets. Medium-term revolving facilities provide us with flexibility in managing 
our resources and capacity to invest further in our existing portfolio, in 
particular allowing us to act swiftly when acquiring properties.

Over the long term, we would expect debt to represent around one third  
of our invested capital, although we consider other metrics, such as interest 
cover, when considering gearing levels.

Financing activity during the year
We have concluded important initiatives during the year to strengthen further 
the Group’s financing arrangements, taking advantage of the current interest 
rate environment and lenders’ appetite to provide secure long-term finance. 

During the year we issued £575 million of secured bonds:

DATE OF ISSUE

October 2016

September 2017

AMOUNT
£M

285.0

290.0

RATE

MATURITY

2.487%

2.348%

2031

2027

The proceeds of the first issue, in October 2016, were used to redeem  
our £61 million 8.5% Debenture Stock, including a prepayment cost of  
£31.1 million, and to terminate interest rate swaps with a notional principal  
of £55 million, at a cost of £34.1 million. The balance was used to reduce 
drawings against our revolving credit facilities. 

Following the second issue, in September 2017, we repaid bank facilities 
totalling £75 million, reduced drawings against our revolving credit facilities, 
with the balance being retained as cash. Subsequently, we cancelled our 
remaining interest rate swaps at a cost of £57.9 million.

Together, these transactions increased our financial resources, diversified 
our sources of debt, reduced the blended cost and extended the average 
maturity. 

56

SOURCES OF FINANCE1

21.2%

CASH AND AVAILABLE 
FACILITIES

£321m

£1.3bn

44.4%

34.4%

   Bonds 

   Term loans

 Revolving bank 
facilities

At 30 September, our cash and undrawn revolving credit facilities totalled  
£320.6 million and our blended cost of debt had fallen over the year by 1.2% 
to 3.3%. The marginal cost of our undrawn facilities was just 1.2%. As we 
continue to fund net investment in our portfolio through further drawings 
against these facilities, our weighted average cost of debt will fall further. 

DEBT SUMMARY1

275

Marginal cost1
1.2%

1,020

Blended cost1,2
3.3%

   Undrawn facilities (£m)

   Drawn bank facilities (£m)

  Long-term debt (£m)

59

291

537

Marginal cost1
1.3%

Blended cost1,2
4.5%

2017

2016

1    Including our 50% share of Longmartin debt. See presentation of  

financial information on page 50

2   Including non-utilisation fees on undrawn bank facilities
3  Based on EPRA net assets
4  Based on net debt 

5 An Alternative Performance Measure (APM). See page 140

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017  
STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

DEBT SUMMARY

Debt excluding Longmartin JV 

- Fixed/hedged debt

- Drawn unhedged bank debt 

Wholly-owned

Longmartin non-recourse debt (50% share)

Total debt1,5

Cash and cash equivalents

- Wholly-owned

- Longmartin (50% share)

Net debt (including our 50% share of Longmartin)1,5

Less: our share of Longmartin net debt

Reported net debt

DEBT1 METRICS

Undrawn floating rate facilities (£m)

Loan-to-value4,5

Gearing3,4,5

Interest cover5

% debt fixed

Blended cost2,5

Marginal cost of undrawn floating rate facilities

Weighted average maturity (years)

DEBT MATURITY PROFILE1
Weighted average maturity: 10.3 years

2017
£M

959.8

-

959.8

60.0

1,019.8

(45.6)

(0.6)

973.6

(59.4)

914.2

275.0

26.7%

36.5%

2.3x

100%

3.3%

1.2%

10.3

2016
£M

657.0

110.7

767.7

60.0

827.7

(15.6)

(2.0)

810.1

(58.0)

752.1

59.3

24.2%

32.6%

2.1x

87%

4.5%

1.3%

9.2

290

285

150

125

135

130

120

60

2018

2019

2020

2021

2022

2023

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2029

2030

2031

2032

2033

2034

2035

2036

  Bank facility (variable) 

     Bonds (fixed)
     Term loan (fixed) 
     JV term loan (fixed, our 50% share)

We are in advanced discussions currently to extend both of our bank facilities from 2018 and 2020 to 2022.

57

58

Risk 
management

The Board’s attitude to risk management is consistent  
with its low overall appetite for risk.

This report should be read in conjunction with the  
viability statement on page 64. 

Overview
The Board structures the Group’s operations to minimise exposure to 
investment, operational and financial risks, and to ensure that there is a 
rigorous, regular review of risks and mitigation across its activities.

Important factors contributing to the relatively low risk of our business 
include:
•   The Group invests only in London’s West End, where there is a long history  

of resilience, stability and sustained occupier demand for restaurant, 
leisure and retail space, which are the principal sources of our rental 
income and portfolio value

•   With a diverse tenant base, there is limited exposure to any single tenant
•   The nature of our portfolio does not expose us to risks inherent in 

material speculative development schemes

•   We have an established and experienced management team, based in one 

location, close to all our holdings

•   We manage our balance sheet on a conservative basis with moderate 

leverage, long-term finance, a spread of loan maturities, good interest  
cover and with the majority of interest costs fixed.

Management structure
As a foundation to effective day-to-day risk management, we have a culture 
which encourages open dialogue within the management team and with the 
wide range of external advisors we employ in running the business. Our 
team, based in one office, within fifteen minutes’ walk of all our holdings, 
comprises four executive directors and 25 staff. The executive management 
team, with an average tenure of over 16 years, has an in-depth knowledge of 
our business and the West End property market. 

The Board’s attitude to risk is embedded in the business, with executive 
directors closely involved in all aspects of operations and significant 
decisions. Non-executive directors approve capital, debt and non-routine 
transactions over a specified level. 

Senior management, below Board level, is incentivised in the same way  
as executive directors to achieve the Group’s strategic goals of delivering 
long-term growth in rental income, capital values and shareholder returns. 
Decisions are made for long-term benefit, rather than short-term gain. 
Succession planning across the management team is continually monitored 
by the Board.

Responsibilities

EXECUTIVE 
MANAGEMENT
Day-to-day management  
of risk. 

Design and implementation  
of appropriate and effective 
systems of internal control.

AUDIT COMMITTEE 

BOARD 

Assurance over the internal 
controls and risk management 
process. 

Overall responsibility for risk 
management. Reviews principal 
risks and uncertainties regularly, 
along with actions taken, where 
practical, to mitigate them.

59

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  RISK MANAGEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Risk management and internal control
The Board reviews the nature and extent of the Group’s principal risks and 
uncertainties, and monitors the risk management framework and internal 
control systems. Such systems are designed to manage, rather than eliminate, 
the risks faced by the business and can provide only reasonable, not absolute, 
assurance against material misstatement or loss. Their adequacy and 
effectiveness are monitored through the risk management and audit 
processes which include financial and property management audits. 

The Group has established processes and procedures to identify, assess, 
and manage the principal risks and uncertainties we face. These processes 
and procedures were in place throughout the year and remained in place 
up to the date of the approval of the Annual Report and accord with the 
Financial Reporting Council’s Guidance on Risk Management, Internal 
Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting (2014).

The key elements of the Group’s procedures and internal financial control 
framework are:
•   Close involvement of the executive directors in all aspects of day-to-day 
operations, including regular meetings with employees to review risks and 
controls.

•   Clearly defined responsibilities and limits of authority.
•   Defined schedule of matters for decision by the Board including significant 
acquisitions, disposals, major contracts, material refurbishment/development 
proposals and any other transaction outside the normal course of business.

•   A comprehensive system of financial reporting and forecasting, which 

includes forecast liquidity requirements and loan covenant compliance.
•   The day-to-day management of the Group’s portfolio is outsourced to 
two managing agents. The Group monitors the performance of each 
managing agent and has established extensive financial and operational 
controls to ensure that each maintains an acceptable level of service and 
provides reliable financial and operational information. The managing 
agents share with the Group their internal control assessments. The Group 
periodically uses the services of an external consultant to review the 
managing agents’ operational processes and controls.

Risk assessment
Operational and financial risks facing the Group are monitored through  
a process of regular assessment by the executive team. The aim of this 
assessment is to:
•   Provide reasonable assurance that material risks are identified.
•   Ensure appropriate mitigation action is taken at an early stage.

Risks are considered in terms of their impact and likelihood from operational, 
financial and reputational perspectives. Risks, and the controls in place to 
mitigate them, are formally reported, discussed and challenged, at meetings 
of the Audit Committee and the Board. To the extent that significant risks, 
failings or control weaknesses arise during the year, these are reported to 
the Board and appropriate action is taken to rectify the issue and implement 
controls to mitigate further occurrences. 

The Audit Committee has monitored the Group’s risk management and 
internal control system, and having reviewed the effectiveness of material 
controls, has not identified any significant failings or weaknesses in the 
Group’s controls during the year.

Principal risks and uncertainties 
The Board has carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks and 
uncertainties which might prevent the Group achieving its goal of long-term 
growth in rental income, capital values and shareholder returns. These risks 
and uncertainties are consistent with those reported in 2016. 

The performance of the UK economy has been relatively resilient since the 
EU referendum in June 2016. Whilst national consumer spending trends are 
unclear, trading in our locations continues to be buoyant, benefiting from 
increasing numbers of international visitors, whose spending power has 
been enhanced by the strength of their local currencies against Sterling 
since the referendum.

Looking ahead, the UK faces a period of uncertainty as it negotiates its exit 
from the EU, which brings a risk of lower business and consumer confidence. 
Whilst it is not possible to conclude as to any long-term impact this may 
have on our business, we expect the West End, underpinned by its wide 
appeal and dynamic economy, will maintain its long record of resilience. 

Details of the principal risks and uncertainties, mitigation and evolution of 
risk during the year are set out on pages 61 to 63.

60

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  RISK MANAGEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

GEOGRAPHIC CONCENTRATION RISK

RISK

POTENTIAL IMPACT

MITIGATION

COMMENTARY

HOW RISK HAS 
EVOLVED

Events which discourage visitors 
to the West End e.g. 

•  Threats to security or public 

safety due to terrorism

•  Health concerns  
(e.g. pandemics)

1

•  Reduced visitor numbers, 
spending and occupier 
demand

•  Reduced rental income  
and/or capital values

•  Potential increased vacancy 
and declining profitability

• Damage to property

Competing destinations lead to 
long-term decline in footfall in 
our villages

1

3

•  Reduced visitor numbers 
and occupier demand
•  Reduced rental income  
and/or capital values

•  Potential increased vacancy 
and declining profitability

London has a growing 
population, is the most visited 
city destination for international 
tourists in the western world, 
and current forecasts are for 
further growth in visitor 
numbers. Across the West End,  
spending and occupier demand 
continue to be healthy

The UK’s terrorism threat level 
currently is “severe” after 
briefly being raised to 
“critical” earlier this year

Footfall and occupier demand 
across our villages remains 
good. We continue to see 
rental growth and low 
underlying vacancy

•  Inherent risk given the 

geographic concentration  
of our investments in a high 
profile location

•  Insurance cover maintained 

for terrorism and loss-of-rent
•  Close liaison with statutory 
authorities to maximise 
safety of visitors

•  Detailed emergency 

response plans 

•  Ensure our villages maintain  

a distinct identity

•  Management strategies to 

create prosperous 
destinations within which 
tenants can operate

•  Seek out new concepts, 

brands and ideas to keep our 
villages vibrant and appealing 

•  Consistent strategy  

on tenant mix, which evolves 
over time

•  Marketing and promotion of  

our villages

•  KPI to deliver sustainable rental 

growth

•  Regular board monitoring of 
performance and prospects

REGULATORY RISK

All our properties are in the 
boroughs of Westminster and 
Camden. Changes to national 
or local policies, particularly 
planning and licensing, could 
have a significant impact on our 
ability to maximise the long-
term potential of our assets

1

2

•  Limit our ability to optimise 

•  Ensure our properties are 

revenues

• Reduced profitability
•  Reduced capital values

operated in compliance with 
local regulations

•  Make representations on 
proposed policy changes, 
to ensure our views and 
experience are considered
•  Mix of uses in our portfolio 
means we are not reliant on 
income from one particular 
use

There are no current 
indications that the evolution 
of planning and licensing 
frameworks, either as a result 
of national or local legislation, 
will have a material impact on 
the Group’s business for the 
foreseeable future

Link to business model:
1

Exceptional portfolio in the heart of London’s West End

2

Focus on restaurants, leisure and retail

3
    Creating distinctive, lively and interesting destinations

Risk increased

Risk unchanged

Risk decreased

61

 
   
   
62

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  RISK MANAGEMENT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

ECONOMIC RISK

RISK

POTENTIAL IMPACT

MITIGATION

COMMENTARY

HOW RISK HAS 
EVOLVED

• Pressure on rents
• Declining profitability
•  Reduced capital values

Economic uncertainty and 
lower confidence could reduce 
consumer spending. Together 
with upward cost pressures, 
this could reduce tenant 
profitability and occupier 
demand

1

2

3

•  Reduced capital values
•  Decrease in NAV, amplified 

by gearing

•  Loan covenant defaults 

Decline in the UK real estate 
market due to macro-
economic factors e.g. global 
political landscape, currency 
expectations, bond yields, 
interest rate expectations, 
availability and cost of finance, 
relative attractiveness of 
property compared with other 
asset classes

2

4

Restaurant, leisure and retail 
tenants provide 70% of our 
annualised current income

In our areas, trading, footfall 
and spending have been 
resilient since the EU 
referendum and we continue 
to benefit from healthy 
demand and rental growth. 
However, uncertainty will 
remain until the UK's future 
arrangements with  
the EU are negotiated

Interest rates have continued 
at historically low levels

Present market sentiment is 
that increases will be moderate 
and gradual, although the 
current political and economic 
backdrop increases uncertainty

•  Focus on assets, locations 

and uses which have 
historically proved to be 
economically resilient

•  Tourism and retail/leisure 

spending in the West End are 
not reliant on the wider-UK 
economy

• Promoting our areas
•  Diverse tenant base with 

limited exposure to any one 
tenant

•  Tenant deposits held against 
unpaid rent obligations at 
30 September 2017: £18.5m

•  Focus on assets, locations 

and uses where: 
-  there is a structural 
imbalance between 
availability of space and 
demand

-   which have historically 

proved to be economically 
resilient and have 
demonstrated much lower 
valuation volatility than the 
wider market

•  Regular review of investment 
market conditions including 
bi-annual external valuations

•  Conservative levels of 

leverage, with the majority 
at fixed rates

•  Spread of sources of finance 

and loan maturities

•  Quarterly forecasts including 
covenant headroom review

•  Pool of uncharged assets 

available to top up security 
held by lenders

Link to business model:
1

Exceptional portfolio in the heart of London’s West End

2

Focus on restaurants, leisure and retail

3
    Creating distinctive, lively and interesting destinations

4

Prudent financial management

Risk increased

Risk unchanged

Risk decreased

63

 
 
   
   
   
 Viability 
 statement

The Board has assessed the prospects of 
the Group over a five year period. Based  
on the assumptions set out below, it has  
a reasonable expectation that the Group 
will be able to continue in operation and 
meet its liabilities as they fall due over  
this assessment period.

The Board considered a five-year review of the Group’s prospects, prepared by senior 
management. This period reflects lease lengths or rent review patterns across the 
majority of our portfolio, and corresponds with the Group’s current forecast period. 
Our forecasts are updated half-yearly and reflect the Group’s established strategy of 
long-term investment in London’s West End, its existing commitments, available 
financial resources, and long-term financing arrangements. They consider profits, cash 
flows, funding requirements and other key financial ratios over the period, as well as the 
headroom in the financial covenants contained in the Group’s various loan agreements.  

KEY FORECAST ASSUMPTIONS  

ASSUMPTIONS

COMMENT

The Group had cash and 
undrawn committed loan 
facilities at 30 September 
2017 totalling £320.6 million, 
which comfortably exceeds 
the Group’s commitments over 
the assessment period. This 
assumes an ability to refinance 
revolving credit facilities totalling 
£150 million and £125 million 
which mature in 2018 and 2020 
respectively.

Crystallisation of the portfolio 
reversionary potential over the 
period. 

The Group maintains a prudent approach 
to gearing, with debt facilities which are 
largely fixed and long-term in nature. At 
30 September, our loan-to-value ratio1 
was 26.7%. The interest on all drawn debt 
was fixed at that point and our weighted 
average maturity of debt was 10.3 years.

The two facilities which mature during the 
period of assessment represent 22.2% of 
our total committed debt facilities. 

We are currently in advanced negotiations 
to refinance both of these facilities and the 
Board has reasonable confidence that these 
negotiations will conclude successfully. 

We have a long record of crystallising 
the independently-assessed ERV of our 
portfolio over a three-to-five year period. 
67% of the total uncontracted portfolio 
reversion arises from restaurants, leisure 
and shops, the demand for which, in 
our locations, is not cyclical and has 
demonstrated sustained long-term 
growth over many years. ERVs are based 
on current, proven rental tones, and do 
not assume any further growth.

Principal risks and uncertainties
The most relevant potential impacts on viability, which arise 
from our principal risks and uncertainties are set out below:
•   A substantial and sustained decrease in visitor numbers to  
the West End and our villages which could result in reduced 
occupier demand, rental income and/or capital values,  
higher vacancy and declining profitability

•   Regulatory changes which could reduce profitability and 

capital values

•   Changing economic conditions which could reduce capital 

values, reducing headroom in loan covenants.

Scenario analysis
In carrying out this review, we assumed no further acquisitions 
nor capital expenditure, other than that which was committed 
or approved by the Board. Similarly, we assume no new debt 
facilities are raised and no debt refinancing takes place, other 
than refinancing the bank facilities which mature during the 
forecast period. 

The review overlaid the potential impact of the principal risks 
which could affect solvency or liquidity in ‘severe but plausible’ 
scenarios onto the five-year forecasts and concluded that the 
business would remain viable. It included sensitivity analyses 
which flexed inputs to the forecasts including reduced income, 
profitability and capital values, both individually and in unison, to 
reflect these severe but plausible scenarios. 

Asset value declines resulting from increasing equivalent yields 
to levels similar to those in 2008/09 were modelled. This would 
result in a near halving of our portfolio valuation. In unison, we 
considered decreases in rental income of up to 40%. These 
assumptions would represent a significant contraction in the 
size of the business over the five-year period. However, our 
assessment is that such a scenario would not threaten the 
viability of the Group.  

Viability
Based on the assessment outlined above, the directors have a 
reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue 
in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the 
five-year period to September 2022.

The Strategic Report on pages 1 to 64 was approved by the 
Board on 27 November 2017.

Brian Bickell 
Chief Executive 

Chris Ward 
Finance Director

1   Based on net debt and including our 50% share of the Longmartin joint venture.

See Financial management on pages 56 to 57

See principal risks and uncertainties on pages 61 to 63 

64

STRATEGIC REPORT  ANNUAL REVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
See principal risks and uncertainties on pages 61 to 63 

65

Governance

66

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Governance

67

STRATEGIC REPORT  OVERVIEW  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 Our
people

 Executive Directors

BRIAN BICKELL, FCA
Chief Executive
Overall responsibility for implementing 
the Group’s strategy and day-to-day 
operations
Joined the Group in 1986

SIMON J QUAYLE, BSC, MRICS 
Executive director
Responsible for the asset management 
and operational strategy in Carnaby, 
Soho and Fitzrovia
Joined the Group in 1987

TOM J C WELTON, MRICS 
Executive director
Responsible for the asset management 
and operational strategy in Covent 
Garden and Chinatown 
Joined the Group in 1989

CHRIS P A WARD, MA (OXON), ACA 
Finance Director 
Responsible for implementation of the 
Group’s financial strategy and all 
aspects of accounting and taxation
Joined the Group in 2012

 Board appointment
Appointed Finance Director on 
20.7.1987 and Chief Executive on 
1.10.2011 

External appointments
Director of Longmartin Properties Limited 
Board member of Westminster 
Property Association
Chairman, UK China Visitor Alliance
Board member of Freehold

 Board appointment
Appointed Property Director 
on 1.10.1997 

External appointments
ZSL development strategy board 
Revo strategy board 

 Board appointment
Appointed Property Director 
on 1.10.1997 

External appointments
Director of Longmartin Properties 
Limited

 Board appointment
Appointed Finance Director 
on 9.1.2012

External appointments
Westway Trust: trustee, chairman of 
audit committee and member of 
property and regeneration committee 

From left to right: Brian Bickell, Chris Ward, Tom Welton and Simon Quayle

68

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Non-executive Directors 

JONATHAN C NICHOLLS ACA, FCT*
Non-executive Chairman and 
Chairman of the Nomination 
Committee 
 Board appointment 1.9.2016 and 
Chairman on 1.10.2016

Experience
From 1985 various roles at Abbey 
National. In 1996 joined Hanson plc 
and became Finance Director in 1998. 
Joined Old Mutual plc in 2006 as 
Group Finance Director
Non-executive director of Man Group 
plc 2004-2006
Non-executive director and chairman 
of the audit committee of Great 
Portland Estates plc 2009-2016
Non-executive director and chairman 
of the audit committee of SIG plc 
2009-2017
Other appointments
Non-executive director, senior 
independent director and chairman of 
the audit committee of D S Smith plc
Non-executive director, senior 
independent director and chairman of 
the audit committee of Ibstock plc

Skills
Over 19 years’ experience of public 
company boards and their operation
Finance, commercial, strategic, 
communication, investor relations and 
management skills
20 years’ experience in property and 
related industries

JILL C LITTLE*
Non-executive director and 
Senior Independent Director
 Board appointment 2010

Experience
John Lewis Partnership 1975 to 2012. 
Merchandise director 2002-2011 and 
Business and Development director 
2011-2012 

Other appointments
Chairman of the Commercial Group of 
the National Trust, NTE Limited and 
NTRE Limited
Non-executive director of Joules 
Group Plc and Nobia AB

Skills
Extensive experience in the retail sector
Communication and management skills

SALLY E WALDEN*
Non-executive director and chairman 
of the Remuneration Committee
Board appointment 2012

Experience
From 1984 to 2009 with Fidelity 
International in senior fund 
management roles

Other appointments
Trustee of the Fidelity Foundation
Director of the Pantry Partnership

Skills
Experience of financial markets and 
fund management
Financial analysis skills 
Experience in remuneration structures

From left to right: Jonathan Nicholls, Sally Walden, Dermot Mathias,  
Jill Little, Richard Akers and Hilary Riva

DERMOT C A MATHIAS BSC, FCA*
Non-executive director and 
Chairman of the Audit Committee
Board appointment 2012

Experience
Partner in the corporate finance 
department of BDO LLP from 1980 
Senior partner of BDO and chairman 
of the policy board of BDO 
International 2002-2009

Other appointments
Non-executive director of Rectory 
Homes Limited
Governor of Activate Learning

Skills
Strong financial skills
Extensive experience in leadership and 
management

RICHARD AKERS FRICS*
Non-executive director
Board appointment 28.11.2017

Experience
Senior executive of Land Securities Group 
plc (1995-2014). Joined main board in May 
2005 following appointment as Managing 
Director of the Retail Portfolio.
Director and President of the British 
Council of Shopping Centres 2009-2012.  

Other appointments
Non-executive director, senior 
independent director and chairman of 
the remuneration committee and safety, 
health and environmental committee of 
Barratt Developments PLC
Member of the advisory board of Battersea 
Power Station Development Company 
Limited

Skills
Broad range of real estate knowledge and 
experience, including retail property

HILARY S RIVA, OBE*
Non-executive director
Board appointment 2010

Experience
Previously managing director of various 
high street brands including Top Shop, 
Warehouse, Dorothy Perkins and Evans 
Chief Executive of the British Fashion 
Council from 2005-2009 and remained 
in a non-executive capacity until 
November 2010 

Other appointments
Non-executive director and chairman 
of the remuneration committee of 
ASOS plc
Director of Shepherd Neame Limited
Skills
Extensive experience in the fashion 
retail sector
Understanding of consumer behaviour 
and strategic planning

* Independent non-executive directors 
for the purposes of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code. More detailed 
biographies are available on our website.

69

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Management team 
Details of the senior leadership team and the Company Secretary are  
set out below. Together with the executive directors, they comprise  
the Executive Committee.  See page 75 for information on the committee.

PENNY THOMAS LLB (HONS), FCIS
Company Secretary
Joined 2005
Advises the Board on governance.  
Responsible for compliance, company 
secretarial and group-wide sustainability.  
Member of sustainability and 
community investment committees.

JULIA WILKINSON BSC MSC MRICS
Portfolio & Group Restaurant 
Strategy Executive
Joined 1997 
Group restaurant and leisure leasing 
strategy and Opera Quarter, Coliseum 
and Fitzrovia asset management.

ANDREW PRICE BSC (HONS), MRICS
Portfolio Executive 
Joined 2001
Group-wide acquisitions strategy and 
Chinatown asset management. 
Chairman of community investment 
committee.  

ROB KIRK BSC (HONS), MRICS
Portfolio Executive
Joined 2004
Carnaby and Soho asset management  
and group-wide property 
management and environmental 
strategy.  
Member of sustainability 
committee. Board member - Soho 
Neighbourhood Forum.

SAM BAIN-MOLLINSON  
BA (HONS) MSC MRICS
Head of Retail
Joined 2011
Group retail strategy and retail 
leasing.

CHARLES OWEN BSC (HONS), MRICS
Portfolio Executive 
Joined 2012
Seven Dials and St Martin’s Courtyard 
asset management and group-wide 
planning.
Member of community investment 
committee.

KAREN BAINES FCIM
Head of Group Marketing & 
Communications
Joined 2016
Consumer, trade and corporate 
communications, marketing and 
events.

Corporate website
shaftesbury.co.uk

Other websites 
carnaby.co.uk
sevendials.co.uk
chinatown.co.uk
thisissoho.co.uk
stmartinscourtyard.co.uk

70

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
71

Governance
 at a glance

THE  
CHAIRMAN
•  Independent  

Chairman 

•  Leadership of  

the Board

THE ROLE OF  
THE BOARD
•  Schedule of matters  

reserved for the Board

•  D&O cover and deeds  

of indemnity

DIVISION OF 
RESPONSIBILITY
•  Separation of roles  
of Chairman and  
Chief Executive

•  Statement of 

responsibilities  
- page 104 

LEADERSHIP

NON-EXECUTIVE 
DIRECTORS
•  Meetings of non-executive  

directors held without 
executives

•  Senior Independent  
Director identified

UK CORPORATE 
GOVERNANCE 
CODE1
Full compliance 
 - see page 74

RISK MANAGEMENT
AND INTERNAL 
CONTROL
•  Robust assessment of  
principal risks - page 59

•  Effectiveness of risk  

management and internal  
control systems - page 60

• Viability statement - page 64

FINANCIAL AND 
BUSINESS REPORTING
•  Annual report which is fair, balanced 

and understandable - page 83

• Auditor’s report - pages 105 to 110

• Business model description - page 11

• Going concern - page 102  

AUDIT COMMITTEE 
AND AUDITORS
•  Audit Committee report - pages 82 to 84

•  Recent and relevant financial experience 

- Dermot Mathias

• Whistleblowing policy - page 29

•  Review of need for internal audit function 

- page 84

THE LEVEL AND 
COMPONENTS OF 
REMUNERATION
•  Annual Remuneration 

report - pages 92 to 100

ACCOUNTABILITY

72

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
GOVERNANCE  AT A GLANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

RE-ELECTION
•  All directors stand for 

annual re-election

•  2 non-executive directors 
have more than 6 years’ 
service and are subject  
to rigorous review

COMPOSITION 
OF THE BOARD
•  Independent Chairman 

•  Balance of 4 executive directors  

and 4 independent non-executive  
directors

•  Skills and experience - pages 68 to 69

COMMITMENT
•  Time commitment 
considered when 
electing and  
re-electing directors

DEVELOPMENT
•  Induction of Chairman 

and non-executive 
director - page 81

•  Directors’ training is 

monitored and updates 
on regulatory and 
legislative changes 
provided

•  New compliance training 

programme

UK CORPORATE 

GOVERNANCE 

CODE1

Full compliance 

 - see page 74

EFFECTIVENESS

EVALUATION
•  Full external Board 

performance 
evaluation - page 77

APPOINTMENTS  
TO THE BOARD
•  Nomination Committee 
process for new non-
executive director 
appointment - page 80

INFORMATION 
AND SUPPORT
•  Company Secretary 

advises the Board through 
the Chairman

•  Access to independent 

professional advice

•  Good information flows 
between management  
and the Board 

DIALOGUE WITH 
SHAREHOLDERS
•  Over 225 meetings with 
investors and potential 
investors in the year,  
including portfolio tours

•  Chairman and Senior 

Independent Director  
available to shareholders

CONSTRUCTIVE  
USE OF GENERAL 
MEETINGS
•  Accessible AGM with voting on  
a poll, separate resolutions and 
proxy voting (for, against or 
withheld)

•  Committee Chairs available  
at AGM to answer questions

•  Notice sent out at least 20 

working days before meeting

RELATIONS  
WITH 
SHAREHOLDERS

PROCEDURE
•  Remuneration policy 

summary table - pages  
90 to 91

•  Annual remuneration  

report - pages 92 to 100 

•  No director is involved  

in fixing their own 
remuneration

REMUNERATION

1  Available at www.frc.org.uk

73

Corporate 
Governance

THE ROLE OF THE BOARD IN 
GOVERNANCE IS TO SET THE 
STRATEGIC AIMS OF THE 
BUSINESS, PROVIDE LEADERSHIP 
AND SUPERVISION AND 
REPORT TO SHAREHOLDERS 
ON ITS STEWARDSHIP

Dear shareholder

I am delighted to be writing to you following my first 
year as your Chairman. 
Corporate governance is embedded in our culture 
and the day-to-day running of your Company. I am 
committed to maintaining the high standards we 
have demonstrated for many years. We pride 
ourselves on being open, transparent and engaged 
with our shareholders, stakeholders and our local 
community. 

We have a well-balanced Board with a good range  
of skills. It is important that I ensure there is a steady 
and smooth rotation and refreshing of non-
executive directors.

Oliver Marriott retired as a director in July having 
served for almost eight years. I thank him, on behalf 
of the Board and shareholders, for his contribution 
during this time. 

We will appoint a new non-executive director,  
Richard Akers, on 28 November 2017. His skills will 
complement those of his fellow directors. He will be 
proposed to shareholders for election at the AGM 
in February 2018. The process leading up to his 
recommendation for election is contained in the 
Nomination Committee report. We are delighted to 
welcome him to the Board.  

In accordance with good governance, each of my 
fellow directors and I will stand for re-election at the 
AGM. The Nomination Committee had recommended 
the re-election of Jill Little and Hilary Riva, who have 
both served on the Board for more than six years, 
having considered the contribution that they make 
to the business and their continuing independence. 

Compliance with the UK 
Corporate Governance 
Code
The Company has complied in full with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code during the year.   
The application of the principles of the Code is 
contained in this report and in the individual 
Committee reports which follow.  

Employees
The knowledge, experience and commitment of our 
employees is critical to the delivery of our strategy. 
I have spent time this year getting to know, not only 
my fellow Board members, but also everyone who 
works for us.  

This year, we have focussed on employee recruitment, 
training and development. We have instigated a 
number of procedures around recruitment to ensure 
we recruit from a diverse talent pool. Training and 
development are important to ensure employees 
grow in their roles and that we continue to retain 
their skills and experience. 

74

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017GOVERNANCE  CORPORATE GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

We have recently formed an Executive Committee 
comprising the executive directors, Company 
Secretary and the senior leadership team. Its role 
is to monitor operational matters and contribute to 
the longer term evolution of the Group’s strategy 
and its implementation. It provides senior employees 
below Board level, greater engagement and 
experience in managing the Group’s business.   

Further information can be found on page 70.

Culture
Culture is important in the operation of the 
Board and throughout the Group. Our corporate 
culture underpins the success of our business 
and is embedded throughout our long-term 
business model.

The Board has an open and transparent culture 
which is facilitated and monitored by me. This is 
particularly evident in Board meetings where we 
engage in constructive and open dialogue.  

As part of our July meeting, Board culture was 
discussed. This was the first stage of our work, to 
articulate and document our culture and values, 
which has been extended throughout the 
organisation.  

Data protection
In addition to the risk and control framework review, 
particular attention has been focussed this year 
to ensure that we have appropriate data and 
information governance processes, controls and 
policies in place ahead of the implementation of 
the General Data Protection Regulation in May 2018. 

Further information on our risks is contained in 
risk management on pages 59 to 63.

Board performance 
evaluation
This year, we have undertaken a full external 
Board performance review. The process, 
recommendations made, and the actions to 
implement those recommendations, are 
summarised on page 77.  

Jonathan Nicholls 
Chairman

27 November 2017

75

GOVERNANCE  CORPORATE GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

THE  
CHAIRMAN

THE ROLE OF  
THE BOARD

DIVISION OF 
RESPONSIBILITY

The Board

NON-EXECUTIVE 
DIRECTORS

LEADERSHIP

There is a balance of executive and non-executive 
directors, with a wide range of business skills, 
including property, finance, retail and fund 
management on our Board. All directors 
contribute to constructive debate in the 
boardroom and to the implementation of the 
Group’s strategy. 

The Chairman was independent on his 
appointment to the Board. He chairs the 
Nomination Committee, but, in line with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code, is not a member of 
the Remuneration or Audit Committees. Each of 
the other non-executive directors is considered 
by the Board to be independent. 

The Board meets regularly and there is an annual 
cycle of topics to be considered, including key 
management and financial updates, as well as 
approval of significant acquisitions and 
refurbishment schemes.

Each Committee provides a summary of business 
discussed to the Board and the minutes of all 
Committees are circulated to the Board.

Whilst strategy is considered at every Board, one 
meeting each year is dedicated to this topic. The 
July 2017 Board meeting focussed on a strategy 
session which considered the impact of external 
changes and developments and how the Group’s 
business model might be affected. This included 
consideration of the Company’s culture, 
succession, the impact of technology, changes in 
consumer behaviours and the tourism market as 
well as the resources and skills the business may 
require in the future.  

Employees below Board level are invited to present 
to the Board on operational topics during the course 
of the year. Non-executive directors have direct 
and open access to employees below Board level. 

BOARD MEETING ATTENDANCE  
(six held)
Chairman  
Jonathan Nicholls
Executive directors  
Brian Bickell

Simon Quayle

Tom Welton

Chris Ward
Non-executive directors  
Jill Little

Oliver Marriott*

Dermot Mathias

Hilary Riva

Sally Walden

*  Five meetings were held in the period prior to  

his retirement on 5 July 2017

 6 

    6
6
    6
    6

    6
 5
6
6
6

STRATEGY

  PERFORMANCE

  RISK

  SUSTAINABILITY  

BOARD

BOARD  
COMMITTEES
Terms of reference are 
available on our website

AUDIT  
COMMITTEE
• Financial reporting

•  Monitor external  

auditors

• Risk and internal control
Audit Committee report  
pages 82 to 84

REMUNERATION 
COMMITTEE
• Remuneration policy

•  Annual remuneration 
including bonus and  
LTIP awards

NOMINATION  
COMMITTEE
• Succession planning

•  Recommend candidates 

to the Board

•  Board performance 

•  Set annual performance 

evaluation

objectives

Remuneration report  
pages 86 to 100

• Diversity
Nomination Committee 
report pages 80 to 81

DISCLOSURE  
COMMITTEE
•  Compliance with market 

abuse regulations

MANAGEMENT 
COMMITTEES

76

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Chaired by Chief Executive
Members: Executive directors,  
Company Secretary, senior  
leadership team (see page 70)

• Evolution of long-term strategy

• Day-to-day operational matters

SUSTAINABILTY COMMITTEE 
Chaired by Chief Executive 
Members: Company Secretary, 
Portfolio Executive 

PENSIONS COMMITTEE
Chaired by Finance Director
Members: Chief Executive, 
Company Secretary

• Sustainability strategy and policy

• Pension scheme governance

•  Annual sustainability report
Sustainability and stakeholders pages  
28 to 33

    
 
GOVERNANCE  CORPORATE GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

EVALUATION

RE-ELECTION

APPOINTMENTS  
TO THE BOARD

COMPOSITION 
OF THE BOARD

INFORMATION  
AND SUPPORT

DEVELOPMENT

COMMITMENT

EFFECTIVENESS

•  All directors are subject to annual 
re-election. Two non-executive 
directors have more than six years’ 
service and were subject to 
rigorous review by the Nomination 
Committee which considered their 
contribution and independence.

•  Training and development of 

directors including the 
implementation of an e-learning 
programme.

•  Close engagement with the business 
and employees and an open-door 
policy for non-executive directors.  

•  Good flow of information to the 

Board.

•  Regular visits/tours of the portfolio.

Board performance evaluation
No evaluation was undertaken last year due to the change of the Chairman 
but, the Board undertook to carry out a full externally-facilitated evaluation 
during the course of 2017. Boardroom Dialogue was appointed to carry 
out the review. Meetings were held with each director and the Company 
Secretary individually. The report was discussed at the September 
meeting of the Board.  

•  The conclusion of the evaluation was that the Board functions well.  

•  The appointment of a new Chairman has been received positively by 

stakeholders and he has settled well into the role.  

•  There is an excellent working relationship at all levels of the Board.

Areas to focus on in the year ahead include:
•  Continuing focus on succession planning for both executive and 

non-executive directors.

•  Increased training and development of employees.

•   Introduce a NED only session at every Board meeting (currently held 

annually).  

• Streamline the volume and format of information to the Board.

The Senior Independent Director reviewed the performance of the 
Chairman. The Chairman reviewed the performance of all other 
directors. 

A review of each committee was undertaken by its members.  

DIALOGUE WITH 
SHAREHOLDERS

CONSTRUCTIVE  
USE OF GENERAL 
MEETINGS

RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS

•  The Board considers regular contact 

with our shareholders to be an 
important aspect of corporate 
governance. Investor relations is the 
responsibility of the Chief Executive. 

•  Tours are held with the UK 

Shareholders Association, which 
represents private investors.

•  During the year, the Chief Executive 
and executive directors held over 
225 meetings with UK and overseas 
institutional investors comprising 
both current and potential 
shareholders. Meetings involved 
either group or individual 
presentations and tours of the 
portfolio. The tours provide an 
opportunity to see the Group’s 
assets, understand management 
strategy, and to meet the senior 
leadership team and other 
employees. 

•  Engagement with equity and market 
analysts including portfolio tours.  

•  Feedback from shareholder and 
analyst meetings is provided to 
the Board. 

•  Analysts’ capital markets day held 

with a focus on Chinatown.  

•  All directors are present at the AGM 
and available to answer questions 
from shareholders. New AGM 
format includes a presentation 
from the Chief Executive on the 
Group’s business.  

•  Live audio webcasts with replay 
facilities are available for the 
annual and half year results 
presentations to analysts.  

77

78

79

COMPOSITION 
OF THE BOARD

RE-ELECTION

APPOINTMENTS  
TO THE BOARD

EVALUATION

Nomination  
committee
 report 

COMMITMENT

DEVELOPMENT

INFORMATION  
AND SUPPORT

EFFECTIVENESS

KEY RESPONSIBILITIES 

•  Review the structure, size  

and composition of the Board 
and its Committees (including  
skills, experience, independence 
and diversity) and make  
recommendations to the  
Board accordingly.

•  Lead the process for new  
Board appointments and  
review succession for directors 
and senior management.
•  Review the time commitment 
expected from the Chairman  
and non-executive directors.
•  Ensure an effectiveness review  
of the Board, its Committees 
and directors is conducted 
annually.

Dear shareholder

The primary role of the Committee is to consider 
Board composition and orderly succession, both for 
executive and non-executive directors. 
During the year, Oliver Marriott retired following eight 
years’ service and Richard Akers will join the Board. 

Succession planning and 
development
As Chairman of this Committee, my focus is on  
Board succession and talent development to ensure 
that there is a pipeline of able and experienced 
people in the business for potential future senior 
executive and Board appointments. 

The Committee ensures that the evolution of the 
Board’s membership is planned and properly managed, 
and that in the event of unforeseen changes, 
management and oversight of the Group’s business 
and long-term strategy would not be disrupted.

To manage executive director succession, we address 
continuity in, and development of, the management 
team below Board level. Current executive directors 
have a long tenure and there are no immediate 
vacancies at Board level. However, we recognise that 
it is important to develop internal talent. Our 
development planning encourages employees to 
fulfil their potential and grow in their roles. 

Search for a non-executive 
director
As part of the evolution of Board membership, and 
following the retirement of Oliver Marriott, a search 
was undertaken to recruit a non-executive director. 
The Board considered the skills required and 
appointed The Zygos Partnership, to undertake the  
search. They have worked with us on a number of 
appointments and appreciate our business, strategy, 
culture, diversity policy and the skills we were seeking. 
Shortlisted candidates were interviewed by myself 
and the Senior Independent Director. The final 
interview was with the Chief Executive, executive 
directors and the Company Secretary. 

The Committee recommended to the Board the 
appointment of Richard Akers, who joins us on 28 
November 2017. We are delighted with his 
appointment, which brings his broad range of 
experience to complement the overall skill set of the 
Board. He has wide experience within the real estate 
and construction sectors. The Committee was careful 
to ensure that his other roles did not give rise to any 
conflicts of interest and that he has sufficient time 
to devote to his directorship. 

A detailed induction programme has commenced 
to familarise Richard with the business. 

We will continue to keep the composition of the 
Board under review.

KEY ACTIVITIES

•  Committee Report 
•  Proposed directors for election and 

re-election   

•  Review skills of directors for re-election 

with more than 6 years’ service

NOVEMBER 2016 
80

Succession planning for executive        directors and non-executive directors

MAY 2017 

SEPTEMBER 2017

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017  
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE  NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

EFFECTIVENESS

Directors standing for 
election and re-election
Richard Akers will be proposed for election to the 
Board at the 2018 AGM.

Jill Little and Hilary Riva have been on the Board for 
more than six years. The Committee has concluded 
that they continue to bring to the Board the 
appropriate range of skills and expertise to operate 
effectively and maintain their independence. The 
Committee therefore recommends that they remain 
on the Board for a further year. Therefore, on the 
advice of the Committee, the Board proposes the 
re-election of each director. Board tenure is set 
out opposite. 

Jonathan Nicholls 
Chairman - Nomination Committee 

27 November 2017

Chairman induction
The Senior Independent Director, assisted by the 
Company Secretary, led a detailed induction, 
summarised below, which commenced prior to 
the Chairman’s appointment to the Board on 1 
September 2016. It took place over several 
months and ensured that he had a thorough 
understanding of the Group, its business and 
operations, and met key stakeholders.  
•  Tours of the Group’s portfolio with the director 

and executive responsible for each area.  
•  Meetings with executive and non-executive 

directors.

• Meetings with key corporate advisors.
•  Meetings and introductions to employees.
• Provision of detailed induction pack.
• Meetings with major shareholders. 
•  Attendance at Committee meetings as an 

observer.

• Attendance at year end results presentation.

The Group is a member of Real Estate Balance whose 
objective is to achieve a better gender balance, at 
board and executive management level, in the real 
estate industry, by supporting the development of 
a female talent pipeline across the sector.

COMMITTEE MEMBERS  
AND MEETING ATTENDANCE  
(three held)
Jonathan Nicholls  
Chairman  

Jill Little 

Oliver Marriott*  
Dermot Mathias  
Hilary Riva 

Sally Walden 
*  Two meetings were held in the period prior to  

his retirement on 5 July 2017

3 

3
1
3
3
3

TENURE OF DIRECTORS  
(at 30 September 2017)
Chairman  
Jonathan Nicholls 
Non-executive directors  
Jill Little 

Dermot Mathias  

Hilary Riva 

Sally Walden 
Executive directors 
Brian Bickell 

Simon Quayle 
Chris Ward 
Tom Welton 

* Period of Board membership

1 year

71/2 years

5 years
71/2 years

5 years

31 years

*20 years
53/4 years

*20 years

Diversity
The Board recognises the importance of diversity, 
both in its membership, and in the Group’s 
employees. It has a clear policy to promote 
diversity across the business.   

The Board considers that quotas are not appropriate 
in determining its composition and has therefore 
chosen not to set targets. 

All aspects of diversity, including but not limited to 
gender, are considered at every level of recruitment. 
All appointments to the Board, and elsewhere in 
the Group, are made on merit. Gender diversity of 
the Board and Group is set out below,

DIRECTORS 

7(70%)  3(30%) 

SENIOR LEADERSHIP TEAM  
(EXCLUDING EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS)

3(43%)  4(57%) 

ALL EMPLOYEES

12(41%)  17(59%)

The Group supports initiatives to promote 
diversity within the real estate sector. Brian 
Bickell is a board member of Freehold,  
a forum for LGBT real estate professionals. 

The Group has committed to the RICS Inclusive 
Employer Quality Mark scheme which aims to drive 
behaviour changes by encouraging businesses in 
the real estate sector to look carefully at their 
employment practices and to ensure inclusivity is 
embedded in their operations. During the year, 
we have appointed three new employees and 
these principles have been applied in the 
recruitment process. Unconscious bias training 
has been held for all employees.  

NOVEMBER 2016 

MAY 2017 

Succession planning for executive        directors and non-executive directors

•  Diversity policy

SEPTEMBER 2017

81

 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK 
MANAGEMENT
AND INTERNAL 
CONTROL

ACCOUNTABILITY

FINANCIAL AND 
BUSINESS  
REPORTING

AUDIT COMMITTEE 
AND AUDITORS

Audit  
committee
report 

KEY RESPONSIBILITIES 

•  Review in detail the work  

of the external auditor and  
valuer and any significant  
financial judgement made  
by management.

•  Monitor the Group’s  

reporting process and  
financial management.

•  Scrutinise the full and half  
yearly financial statements.

•   Consider the appointment  

of the external auditor, their  
reports to the Committee  
and their independence.

•  Review the risk  

management framework  
and ensure that risks are  
carefully identified and  
assessed, and that systems  
of risk management and  
internal control are in place  
and effective.

•  Review the Group’s  
arrangements by which  
employees and our supply  
chain may raise concerns  
about possible improprieties  
in financial reporting or  
other matters.

Dear shareholder

I am pleased to present the Committee’s report  
for the year. 

The Committee is an important element of the 
Group’s governance structure and provides effective 
oversight of the performance, independence and 
objectivity of the auditor and the audit process.  

Our role is to review and advise the Board on 
financial reporting including the processes around 
the portfolio valuation, which is the most significant 
figure in the annual results. This, and other judgements 
made by the Board in the preparation of the financial 
statements, are discussed in detail below. 

The Committee advises the Board on various 
statements made in the Annual Report, including those 
on viability, going concern, risk and controls and 
whether, when read as a whole, the Annual Report is 
fair, balanced and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s performance, business model and strategy. 

The Committee also oversees the Group’s risk 
management framework and processes.  

Going concern
The Committee reviewed whether it was appropriate 
to adopt the going concern basis in the preparation 
of the results. In considering this, we reviewed the 
Group’s five-year forecasts, availability of committed 
bank facilities and expected headroom under the 
financial covenants in our debt arrangements. This 
review included sensitivity analyses. Following the 
review, it recommended to the Board that it was 
appropriate to adopt the going concern basis. The 
Board’s confirmation is set out on page 102.

Viability statement
At the request of the Board, the Committee reviewed 
the Viability Statement and the period for which the 
Board should assess the prospects of the Group. 
Last year, the Group considered a five-year period 
to be appropriate. Following the review, the 
Committee concluded that this period remains 
appropriate. The Committee reviewed a report from 
management which set out the basis for the conclusions 
in the Viability Statement, including scenario analyses. 
The Board’s Viability Statement is set out on page 64.

KEY ACTIVITIES

• Annual report
•  Recommend  

re-appointment of auditors

• Committee report

NOVEMBER 2016

82

• Approved auditor fees
• Objectivity of auditors
• Viability statement
• Going concern
• Risks and internal control

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017GOVERNANCE  AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Financial statements
The executive directors confirmed to the Committee that they were 
not aware of any material misstatements in the Annual Report and the 
auditors confirmed that they had found no material misstatements in 
the course of their work. 

After reviewing the reports from management and, following its 
discussions with the auditors and valuers, the Committee is satisfied 
that the financial statements appropriately address the critical 
judgements and key estimates, both in respect of the amounts 
reported and the disclosures. The Committee is satisfied that the 
processes used for determining the value of the assets and liabilities 
have been appropriately reviewed, challenged and are sufficiently 
robust. 

2017 annual report:
Fair, balanced and understandable 
The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report. The 
Committee reported to the Board that the Annual Report:
• was fair, balanced and understandable;
•  provided the necessary information for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s performance, business model and strategy; and
•  had been written in straightforward language, without unnecessary 
repetition of information, and that the use of any adjusted 
measures, e.g. those set out in EPRA Best Practice 
Recommendations, had been adequately explained and reconciled 
to the financial statements and not been given more prominence 
than a corresponding measure under IFRS. 

The Committee considered the systems and controls around the 
preparation of the financial statements, the procedures to bring 
relevant information to the attention of the preparers of the financial 
statements, and whether the report was in accordance with the 
information provided to the Board during the year.

Significant judgements: 
Valuation of investment properties
The valuation opinion provided by independent external valuers is one 
of the critical components of the annual and half year financial results. 
External valuations are subjective and require significant judgement to 
be exercised by the valuation firm.  

To assist the Board’s review of the valuation, management prepared  
a detailed analysis. The valuers presented their valuation to the 
Committee, providing comparable evidence for key judgements. 
Following the presentation, the Committee had a discussion with the 
valuers without management present. 

The auditors use in-house real estate specialists, who met with  
the valuers as part of their audit and report their findings to the 
Committee. 

The Board considered the valuation at its meeting to approve  
the financial statements.

Other areas of judgement
Whilst not material in the context of the Group’s assets or net assets, 
the Committee reviewed the judgements made by management in 
calculating the charge for equity-settled remuneration.

COMMITTEE MEMBERS  
AND MEETING ATTENDANCE  
(three held)
Dermot Mathias  
Chairman  

Jill Little 

Oliver Marriott*  

Hilary Riva 

Sally Walden 

*  Two meetings were held in the period prior to  

his retirement on 5 July 2017 

3 

3
1
3
3

• Half year results
• Audit plan & strategy
• Review of auditors
• Approved non-audit fees
• Risk and controls

MAY 2017

• Whistleblowing policy review
•  Considered need for internal audit function
•  Reviewed risks and internal controls  

framework 

• Cyber security 

SEPTEMBER 2017

83

 
 
 
Internal audit 
In view of the focussed nature of the Group’s business, the close 
involvement of the executive directors in day-to-day decision making and 
relatively simple structure, together with the regular independent reviews of 
the processes and controls of managing agents, the Committee has advised 
the Board that, at the present time, it considers that there is no need to 
establish an internal audit function.

The need for an internal audit function is reviewed annually.

Audit fees 
Fees payable to the Group’s auditors for audit and non-audit services are 
set out in note 4 to the Financial Statements on page 121. 

Total fees related to non-audit services represented 41% of the total fees 
for audit and assurance services (2016: 50%). 

The auditors were also paid £31,000 (2016: £27,000) for their audit of 
Longmartin Properties Limited. The Company’s 50% share of this was 
£15,500 (2016: £13,500).

Dermot Mathias 
Chairman – Audit Committee

27 November 2017

GOVERNANCE  AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

External auditors
The Committee is satisfied with the effectiveness of the external audit. The 
Company has complied with the provisions of the Statutory Audit Services 
for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive 
Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014.

This is the second year that Eamonn McGrath has been the lead audit 
partner. There are no contractual obligations restricting the Group’s choice 
of external auditor. In accordance with the current regulations, the Group 
will re-tender the audit at least every ten years.

Annual auditor assessment 
Annually, the Committee assesses the qualifications, expertise, resources, 
and independence of the Group’s external auditors, as well as the 
effectiveness of the audit process. It does this through discussion with the 
Finance Director, review of a detailed assessment questionnaire and 
confirmations from the external auditor. The Chairman of the Committee 
and the Finance Director also met with an independent partner of Ernst & 
Young LLP. 

This is the second year that Ernst & Young LLP have been our auditor and 
following informal assessments, to date, the Committee is satisfied with the 
effectiveness of the external audit and the interaction between the auditors 
and the Committee. Following completion of the current year’s audit, the 
Committee will carry out a formal assessment of the audit process.  

Ernst & Young LLP has confirmed to the Committee that: 
•  They have internal procedures in place to identify any aspects of 
non-audit work which could compromise their role as auditors and to 
ensure the objectivity of their audit report. 
•  The total fees paid by the Group during the year do not represent a 
material part of their firm’s fee income. 
•  They consider that they have maintained their audit independence 
throughout the year. 

The Committee has satisfied itself as to their qualifications, expertise and 
resources and remains confident that their objectivity and independence 
are not in any way impaired by reason of the non-audit services which they 
provide to the Group. 

Award of non-audit assignments to the 
external audit firm
The policy of the Committee is that non-audit assignments are not awarded 
to the external audit firm if there is a risk that their audit independence and 
objectivity could be compromised. Other than in exceptional circumstances, 
non-audit fees should not exceed audit and assurance fees in any year. The 
award of any non-audit assignment to the Group’s auditors in excess of 
£25,000 is subject to the prior approval of the Committee. 

There was one non-audit assignment during the year relating to the issue of 
a First Mortgage Bond by Shaftesbury Chinatown PLC.

84

85

KEY RESPONSIBILITIES 

•  Determine the terms of  

employment and remuneration 
for executive directors and 
the Company Secretary. 

•  Ensure that the executive  
directors are remunerated 
fairly and responsibly with the 
long-term interests of the 
Company in mind.

•  Consider the appropriateness 
of the directors’ remuneration 
framework against  
arrangements for other      
employees. 

•  Review the remuneration  
policy every three years. 

•  Approve the design, targets 
and outcomes for the annual 
bonus schemes and share 
incentive schemes. 

•  Ensure that the remuneration 
report and disclosure of director 
remuneration is simple to read 
and understand, accurate and 
complete. 

Remuneration
 report 

THE LEVEL AND 
COMPONENTS OF 
REMUNERATION

Dear shareholder

PROCEDURE

REMUNERATION

I am pleased to present our 2017 remuneration report. 
The remuneration policy sets out our approach  
to the reward of executive and non-executive 
directors. Our aim is to provide a remuneration 
structure which is fair, with incentives aligned  
with the Group’s strategy and long-term objectives,  
and which encourages executive continuity.

We have reported another strong set of results which 
has delivered growth in income and the value of the 
business. We have continued intensive asset 
management of our portfolio and completed important 
refinancing initiatives, as summarised in the Strategic 
Report on page 56. Against the backdrop of this 
performance, the Committee’s main decisions during 
the year related to the following elements:

Annual bonus outcomes
At the beginning of each year, we set financial and 
operational targets for the annual bonus scheme 
which align with the Group’s long-term strategy. Where 
projects extend for periods beyond the financial year, 
annual targets are set to assess progress towards 
achievement of the ultimate objectives. In setting 
targets, we use the Group’s KPIs which drive value 
through the delivery of long-term rental growth. 

The outcome of performance against our targets  
was 55% of the maximum potential award. The 2017 
bonus targets are disclosed in full on page 94. 

Each executive director has elected to receive his 
award solely in the form of deferred shares, and will 
therefore receive an award under the Deferred 
Annual Share Bonus Scheme of 82.5% of salary in 
December 2017, which will vest in December 2020.

2018 salary review 
Salaries of executive directors were reviewed and 
increases of 2% were approved, effective from 
1 December 2017. This is below the average salary 
increases awarded to employees.

2018 annual bonus
The Committee reviewed the annual bonus 
framework for 2018 to ensure it remained aligned to 
the Group’s strategy and operational goals. We 
decided that the performance measures remained 
appropriate but would introduce two minor 
amendments to the calibration for the year ahead. 
First, we are increasing the weighting of the “growth 
in ERV” metric from 20% to 35% of the overall 
bonus to reflect the strategic importance of rental 
growth to the business. Second, for that ERV metric, 
we will introduce a target range with a payout scaled 
from threshold to maximum, depending on the 
performance achieved. This reflects feedback from 
our investors and is intended to make the target 
more stretching whilst also providing greater 
incentive to maximise performance within a range of 
potential outcomes. Targets will be fully disclosed 
retrospectively in next year’s report.

KEY ACTIVITIES

•  Set annual bonus targets
• Annual bonus outcomes
•  Annual review of  

remuneration policy

• Ratify LTIP vesting
• LTIP grant approval
• Committee report

NOVEMBER 2016  

(2 MEETINGS)

86

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017GOVERNANCE  REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Remuneration policy
Our policy was approved at the 2016 AGM, with 
94% of shareholders, who voted, voting in favour. 
The policy table is summarised on page 91 for 
ease of reference. 

We are not proposing any changes this year. 

The 2016 Annual Remuneration Report was approved 
at the 2017 AGM, with 99% of shareholders who 
voted, voting in favour.

We will review our policy during 2018 for 
shareholder approval in 2019.  

We look forward to receiving your continued 
support at the forthcoming AGM.

Sally Walden 
Chairman - Remuneration Committee 

27 November 2017 

Context for the Group’s 
remuneration approach
The Group has 29 employees, including four 
executive directors. The combined holdings of 
the executive directors is just over 3.1 million 
shares (market value at 30 September 2017 of 
circa £31 million). This equates to individual 
holdings of between 3 and 30 times their 
annual salary. 

These substantial holdings have been built up 
over a number of years through a combination of:
•  Taking the annual bonus in shares through 
the Deferred Annual Share Bonus scheme; 
•  Retaining shares from the LTIP; and
• Acquiring shares for cash.
The Group’s small team of executive directors 
and key employees all have a close 
involvement in the continuing development 
and implementation of the Group’s strategy. 
Consequently, the Committee considers it 
appropriate that, in setting objectives and 
measuring performance, emphasis is placed 
on team rather than individual performance. 

Average length of service of the executive 
directors is 24 years and of the executive 
committee is eleven years. 

LTIP vesting
LTIP awards which were made in 2014 will vest in 
December 2017, based on a three year performance 
period which ended on 30 September 2017. 
Annualised TSR of 15.5% per annum exceeded 
that of the benchmark (FTSE 350 Real Estate 
Index) by 11% per annum over the period. Growth 
in NAV exceeded the benchmark RPI by 7.9% 
over the period. As a result of this performance, 
the TSR target and the NAV target were fully met 
resulting in 100% vesting of these awards. 

2018 LTIP grant 
An LTIP award will be made in December 2017 at 
125% of basic annual salary with a three-year 
performance period ending 30 September 2020.  
Subject to performance against the targets (TSR 
performance compared with the FTSE 350 REIT 
Index and NAV growth), which will remain 
unchanged, the awards will vest in December 
2020, and be released in December 2022 
following a two-year post-vesting holding period. 

Alignment with employees
In reviewing salaries and bonus outcomes, we 
consider overall remuneration packages of the 
executive directors. Employee remuneration 
levels are considered when reviewing executive 
directors’ salaries. Employees receive the same 
benefits as directors; they participate in the LTIP 
and have the opportunity to defer their annual 
bonus into shares. They also participate in 
Sharesave, and receive health and life insurance.  

The Company makes a pension contribution to 
employees: executive directors receive 25% of 
salary and all other employees receive 17.5% of 
salary. This is paid into a pension or may be taken 
as a cash equivalent, in which case it is reduced for 
any associated tax borne by the Group.

Review of non-executive 
director and chairman fees
Fees for non-executive directors, including the 
Chairman, are reviewed every two years. 

Fees for non-executive directors were reviewed by 
the Board and new fee levels equating to an increase 
of 3.6% will take effect from 1 December 2017.   

The Committee reviewed the Chairman’s fee 
taking into account his time commitment, 
experience and performance. His performance 
during his first year in the role was reviewed in a 
process led by the Senior Independent Director.  
The Committee agreed to increase the fee to 
£225,000 with effect from 1 December 2017. The 
fee will remain below the lower quartile of UK 
listed companies of a similar financial size and 
most of our closest industry peers.  

• Market update  
• Update on LTIP 
• Review AGM feedback    
• Review terms of reference

MAY 2017

COMMITTEE MEMBERS  
AND MEETING ATTENDANCE  
(four held)
Sally Walden  
Chairman  

Jill Little 

Oliver Marriott*  

Dermot Mathias  

Hilary Riva 

*  Three meetings were held in the period prior to  

his retirement on 5 July 2017 

4 

4
3
4
4

ADVISOR TO THE COMMITTEE 

Deloitte LLP act as independent  
advisor to the Committee.  

Deloitte LLP is a member of the Remuneration 
Consultants Group and voluntarily operates 
under the Code of Conduct in relation to 
executive remuneration consulting in the 
UK. The Committee is satisfied that the 
Deloitte LLP engagement partner and team 
that provide remuneration advice to the 
Committee do not have connections with 
the Group that may impair their objectivity 
and independence. The fees charged by 
Deloitte LLP for the provision of independent 
advice to the Committee during the 
financial year were £24,500 (excluding 
VAT). Deloitte LLP provided no other 
services to the Group during the year. 

•  Salary review
•  Review advisor’s performance
•  Preparation for year end  
remuneration processes
•  Review Chairman’s fees
• Dilution review

SEPTEMBER 2017

87

 
  
 
 
  
 
88

Remuneration 
at a glance

SALARY

+

BENEFITS

PENSION

+

+

ANNUAL BONUS

+

LTIP

TOTAL 
REMUNERATION

=

FIXED PAY

PERFORMANCE-RELATED PAY

PERFORMANCE-RELATED PAY FRAMEWORK (2017 AWARDS)

10%

let vacant  
space on a  
timely basis  
(KPI)

10%

sustainability  
performance

N

S

H

A

L

I F  TAKEN I
R Y  
F   S A L ARY IF T

K

A

% O
ANNUAL  
BONUS

F S A
 O
%
0
5
1

0
0
1

O

T

O

T

P

E

N

I

N
C
A
S
H

P

U

U

10%

effectively  
achieve full  
lettings

10%

manage  
property 
expenses

20%

achieve growth  
in ERVs (KPI)

A

R

E

S

40%

deliver projects/ 
transactions  
successfully

R

O

N

F 15 0 %   O F   S ALARY IN 
LTIP     
STAN

I

X

M

U

M

O
D
R
A
W

A

M

A

L

C

I

R
C
U
M

A

M

C

E

S

50%on TSR measured  

relative to FTSE 350 
REIT Index

50%on NAV growth

2017 GROUP PERFORMANCE

RENTS RECEIVABLE

EPRA EARNINGS PER SHARE1

PORTFOLIO VALUE1

TSR (SHAFTESBURY)

£103.4m
+5.1%

16.2p
+15.7%

£3.64bn
+7.0%2

+6.5%

ERV GROWTH2

DIVIDENDS PER SHARE

EPRA NAV PER SHARE 1

TSR (FTSE350 REAL ESTATE INDEX)

+3.5%

16.0p
+8.8%

£9.52
+7.2%

1  An alternative performance measure (APM). See page 140 

2   Like-for-like. See Glossary on page 147

+5.5%

89

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Summary
of remuneration policy 

Our policy was approved on 5 February 2016. 

A summary of the Remuneration Policy table for 
executive director remuneration is reproduced 
opposite for information only. 

The full Remuneration Policy is on our website and 
set out on pages 84 to 91 of the 2015 Annual Report.

90

GOVERNANCE  SUMMARY OF REMUNERATION POLICY  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Executive Directors

ELEMENT
SALARY

OPERATION / PERFORMANCE MEASURES
Salaries are normally reviewed annually with effect from 1 December. Any increases are  
determined with reference to inflation and the salary increases for other employees, unless 
there is a change of role or responsibility or a new director is recruited 

Sector and other relevant market data (e.g. against constituent companies of the FTSE 350  
REIT Index) may be requested from remuneration advisors as required

The Committee recognises the importance of setting salaries at levels in the context of  
market median levels in the real estate sector, but which are not excessive in relation to the 
Group’s particular strategy and features. The emphasis in the Group’s remuneration policies is  
to place greater weight on performance-based rewards within the overall remuneration package

ANNUAL 
BONUS

Annual performance targets are set by the Committee at the beginning of the year and are  
linked to the Group’s strategy and key business objectives 

At the end of the financial year, the Committee evaluates performance against these objectives, 
whilst also taking into account overall financial performance and future prospects. The Committee 
also satisfies itself that short-term targets have not been met at the expense of long-term goals 

Within the limits of the scheme, the Committee has discretion to adjust bonus outcomes  
(upwards or downwards) as it considers appropriate, to ensure alignment of pay with overall 
performance and market conditions

Minimum performance required for any part of the bonus to be earned is calibrated so as  
to be appropriately stretching and achievable 

Where directors take all or part of the bonus as an award of shares (in the form of a  
conditional award of shares or a nil-cost option), these awards vest after a minimum of  
three years from grant under the Company’s deferred bonus plan. No further performance  
conditions apply. Awards may also, at the Committee’s discretion, be settled in cash 

Malus and clawback provisions apply to all elements of the bonus. Performance is assessed 
against a set of key financial and non-financial annual measures which may vary each year  
depending on the annual priorities of the business

Measures will be weighted in alignment with the Group’s strategy for each year. A substantial  
part of the total bonus will be based on quantitative KPIs. Further details of the measures, 
weightings and targets applicable for a given period are provided in the Annual Remuneration 
Report for that year

MAXIMUM POTENTIAL VALUE
The Committee does not 
specify a maximum salary 
or maximum salary increase
Further details on salary 
levels and any increases 
are provided in the Annual  
Remuneration Report

Directors have the choice 
to take a bonus in shares or 
cash, in full or part as follows:
Up to 150% of salary if taken 
entirely in shares;
or
Up to 100% of salary if taken 
entirely in cash

LTIP

Awards may be granted in the form of nil cost options, conditional share awards or, at the  
Committee’s discretion, be settled in cash 

At the end of the performance period, performance against the targets is calculated, and the 
percentage of awards that will vest is determined

Unless the Committee determines otherwise, vested awards will then be subject to an additional 
holding period before participants are entitled to receive their shares. A holding period will  
normally last for two years, unless the Committee determines otherwise

Malus and clawback provisions apply to the LTIP 

The awards will be subject to performance targets measured over a three-year period. It is intended 
that these performance measures are aligned to strategic objectives and shareholder value

Maximum value 150% of salary 
at date of grant in normal 
circumstances

Maximum value 200% of salary 
in exceptional circumstances 
such as executive recruitment 
(this has not been used to 
date)

The current performance measures are:

• TSR measured relative to a relevant index of peers; and

• NAV growth

Threshold vesting is 25% of the award. The detailed targets are set out in the Annual Remuneration Report

Executive directors are eligible to participate in other share plans, which are offered on  
similar terms to all employees, for example Sharesave and SIP

The limits are as defined by 
HMRC from time to time

ALL 
EMPLOYEE 
PLANS

PENSION Contribution paid into a personal pension plan or taken as a cash equivalent, reduced  

25% of salary

OTHER  
BENEFITS

for any resultant tax liability borne by the Group

Each executive director currently receives:

• car allowance

• private medical cover

• life insurance

• permanent health insurance

Other benefits may be provided if considered reasonable and appropriate by the  
Committee, including, but not limited to, housing allowance and relocation allowance

There is no maximum value. 
Benefits are set at a level 
which the Committee 
determines is reasonable and 
appropriate

The value may vary depending 
on service provided, cost and 
market conditions

91

Annual 
 remuneration
 report 

Set out below is the annual remuneration report on directors’ 
pay for the year ended 30 September 2017. 
The report details how we intend to apply the remuneration policy 
for the year ahead and how we implemented it during the year.

Statement of implementation of remuneration for the year ending  
30 September 2018 
Executive directors’ salaries from 1 December 2017

B BICKELL

S J QUAYLE

T J C WELTON

C P A WARD

1.12.2017
£’000 

1.12.2016 
£’000 

INCREASE

500

353

353

349

490

346

346

342

2%

2%

2%

2%

This compares to an average increase across the employee population of 5%. 

Annual bonus targets
Maximum bonus of up to 150% of salary (if taken in shares) and 100% of salary (if taken in cash).

Disclosure of annual bonus targets for the year ending 30 September 2018 is deemed to be commercially sensitive and therefore the actual targets are not 
set out in this report. A range for the rental growth target is being introduced with a threshold level for achievement. The targets will be disclosed 
retrospectively next year, provided they are no longer commercially sensitive.  

MEASURE

RENTAL GROWTH

Deliver growth in ERVs1

OCCUPANCY

Maximise portfolio occupancy

Let vacant property quickly1

OTHER

Ratio of property outgoings to gross rents receivable

Corporate responsibility performance

Deliver projects/transactions successfully

WEIGHTING

TARGET OR REASON FOR NON-DISCLOSURE

35%

10%

5%

10%

40%

The Committee considers specific disclosure of targets regarding the 
achievement of rental levels, the speed of completing letting or delivery 
of specific projects or transactions would be prejudicial to the interests of 
shareholders. As a consequence of the geographic concentration of the Group’s 
portfolio, disclosure of such targets could have a material adverse impact on the 
Group’s position when negotiating transactions with current or potential tenants 
or other parties

To match baseline year (2013) corporate responsibility scores in GRESB and EPRA 
reporting benchmarks
Specific operational objectives to be met during the year critical to progressing 
long-term property projects and financing

1  Group KPIs

92

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017GOVERNANCE  ANNUAL REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 

LTIP
LTIP awards of 125% of salary will be granted in December 2017. Performance will be measured over a three-year period which commenced on 1 October 2017. 
A two-year post-vesting holding period will apply to these awards.

The performance measures will remain the same as those applicable to awards made last year and are as set out on page 95.

Non-executive directors’ fees from 1 December 2017
Non-executive director fees are reviewed every two years and were reviewed this year to take effect from 1 December 2017. 

Fees for the Chairman were increased to £225,000. Fees for non-executive directors were increased to £57,000. There is an additional fee of £10,000 
where a non-executive director chairs a committee and for the Senior Independent Director (if not already in receipt of a Committee Chairman fee). 
There was no change to that fee. The Chairman does not receive an additional fee for chairing the Nomination Committee.  

Remuneration for year ending 30 September 2017
Single total figure of remuneration for executive directors (audited)

SALARY

BENEFITS1

PENSION  
BENEFIT2

ANNUAL  
BONUS3

LTIP4

OTHER5

TOTAL

2017 
£’000

2016  
£’000

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

B BICKELL

S J QUAYLE

T J C WELTON

C P A WARD

489

345

345

341

483

341

341

333

51

47

38

33

50

47

34

29

107

106

76

76

76

75

75

76

404

285

285

282

437

308

308

302

773

545

545

531

877

619

619

571

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1,825

1,954

1,299

1,391

1,290

1,378

1,264

1,312

1   Benefits comprise car allowance, permanent health insurance, life insurance and health insurance

2  Pension contribution is 25% of salary and may be taken in cash (in part or entirely). The cash equivalent is reduced by any resultant tax liability borne by the Group

3   Payment for performance in respect of the relevant financial year. For 2017, the executive directors could have received bonuses of 82.5% of salary in shares or 55% of salary in cash. 

Each director has elected to take their 2017 bonus entirely in shares, which are deferred for a period of three years. No further performance criteria apply

4   Reflects the vesting of shares in the LTIP in respect of performance for the relevant financial year. The TSR and NAV performance conditions for the three-year performance period to 
30.9.2017 were met in full and 100% of the awards vested. The value of these awards has been calculated by multiplying the number of shares that will vest by the three-month average 
share price to 30.9.2017 of £9.896. The 2016 estimated figure has been restated to reflect actual share price at the date of vesting. The value of dividends paid, or to be paid, on 
vested shares is also included

5  Sharesave options have been valued based on the monthly savings amount and the discount on the option price of 20%

Single total figure of remuneration for non-executive directors (audited)

FEE

2017 
£’000

150

-

55

42

55

55

55

2016  
£’000

12

129

55

55

55

55

55

COMMITTEE CHAIR/ SENIOR 
INDEPENDENT DIRECTOR1 FEES

BENEFITS 

TOTAL

2017 
£’000

2016  
£’000

2017 
£’000

2016  
£’000

-

-

10

-

10

-

10

-

-

9

-

9

-

9

3

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2017  
£’000

153

-

65

42

65

55

65

J C NICHOLLS2

J S LANE

J C LITTLE

O J D MARRIOTT3

D C A MATHIAS

H S RIVA

S E WALDEN

1  Fee is only payable if the Senior Independent Director is not the chair of any other Committee 

2  Joined Board on 1.9.2016 and became Chairman on 1.10.2016

3  Fees up to 5.7.2017 when he retired from the Board 

2016  
£’000

12

129

64

55

64

55

64

93

 
 
GOVERNANCE  ANNUAL REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 

Annual bonus outcome for year ended 30 September 2017
Full retrospective disclosure of the targets for the 2017 annual bonus scorecard is provided below. The bonus will be paid in December 2017.  

MEASURE

WEIGHTING

TARGET

ACHIEVEMENT

PERCENTAGE 
AWARDED

RENTAL GROWTH

Achieve growth in ERVs1,2

OCCUPANCY

20% Extent by which Group commercial 
leasing transactions exceed valuers’ 
ERV by 5% in previous year

Commercial leasing transactions exceeded 
previous year ERV on average by 6.7% 

Annual like-for-like growth in Group 
total ERV to exceed 5%

Annual growth in Group total ERV: 3.5% 

10%

Let vacant space on a timely basis1,2

10% Complete lettings within target 

Targets met for each use.

10%

periods set by us

(measured from date space became 
available to let; range 1 – 3 months; 
excludes larger schemes3) 

Average period vacant: 1.5 months

Effectively achieve full occupancy2

10% ERV of space available to let not to 

Quarterly EPRA vacancy: Range 1.5% - 3.0% 

10%

exceed 3% of Group ERV (measured 
quarterly; excludes larger schemes3)

OTHER

Manage property expenses2

Corporate responsibility 
performance

10% Ratio of property outgoings to gross 
rents receivable not to exceed three 
year rolling average

Ratio for year: 14.6%

Rolling three year average: 14.5%

10% Maintain relative rankings in key 

EPRA Gold award

indices:

• EPRA
• GRESB 

GRESB “green star” rating

Although a number of project targets were 
met, letting progress at two completed larger 
projects did not meet their respective targets 
set at the beginning of the year 

Deliver projects and transactions 
successfully

40% Specific operational objectives to be 
met during the year critical to:

Progressing key long-term projects 
and larger schemes3

Maintaining long-term stability in the 
Group’s financing arrangements 

TOTAL

100%

0%

10%

15%

55% 

Committee’s exercise of discretion

The Committee has not exercised discretion in the award of bonuses for the 
year ended 30 September 2017. The table opposite shows historic exercise of 
discretion by the Committee.  

ACTUAL BONUS PERCENTAGE 
POTENTIAL ACCORDING TO 
ACHIEVEMENT TABLE

BONUS PERCENTAGE AFTER 
EXERCISE OF DISCRETION BY 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE

70%

82%

55%

Reduced to 60%

Reduced to 60%

55%

YEAR

2015

2016

2017

1 Group KPIs

2 Wholly-owned portfolio

3 Larger schemes: Thomas Neal’s Warehouse, Central Cross and 57 Broadwick Street

94

GOVERNANCE  ANNUAL REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 

LTIP vesting for the performance period to 30 September 2017

The detailed performance against targets which resulted in full vesting of the 
LTIP in 2017 is as follows:

HISTORIC LTIP VESTING PERFORMANCE

  100

Vesting %
100

  76.7

  100

  100

  63.5

  50

  50

2011 
Year of vesting

2012 

2013 

2014 

2015 

2016 

2017

TSR
NAV

ANNUALISED TSR 
OF THE COMPANY’S 
SHARES LESS 
ANNUALISED TSR OF 
THE FTSE 350 REAL 
ESTATE INDEX

AWARD VESTING CRITERIA PERFORMANCE

Less than 0% pa

0%

0% pa

20%

Between 0% pa  
and 5.5% pa

Pro-rata on a straight 
line basis between  
20% and 100%

5.5% pa or more

100%

Performance in  
three-year period  
to 30 September 2017: 
15.5% pa and 
outperformed the 
benchmark by 11.0% pa

Vesting outcome (for this 
half of the award) 
100% of maximum

50

0

ANNUALISED NAV 
GROWTH LESS 
ANNUALISED RPI 
GROWTH

AWARD VESTING CRITERIA PERFORMANCE

Less than 3% pa

0%

3% pa

30%

Between 3% pa 
and 7% pa

Pro-rata on a straight 
line basis between 30% 
and 100%

7% pa or more

100%

Performance in  
three year period to  
30 September 2017:  
10.1% pa versus RPI 
growth of 2.2%. 
Outperformance of 7.9%

Vesting outcome (for this 
half of the award) 
100% of maximum

Share scheme interests awarded during the year (audited) 

SCHEME

B BICKELL

Deferred Annual Share Bonus Scheme1
LTIP2

S J QUAYLE

Deferred Annual Share Bonus Scheme1
LTIP2

T J C WELTON Deferred Annual Share Bonus Scheme1

LTIP2

C P A WARD

Deferred Annual Share Bonus Scheme1 
LTIP2

FACE VALUE AT  
DATE OF 
AWARD £’000

438
607

309
429

309
429

302
424

1   Deferred Annual Share Bonus Scheme: Directors elected to take their annual bonus for 
the year ended 30.9.2016 in shares which were purchased in the market. The face value 
is calculated using the price paid to acquire the shares, being £8.91028. No further 
performance criteria are applied to share awards under this scheme.

Target performance for the awards granted during the year is as follows:

ANNUALISED TSR OF THE COMPANY’S 
SHARES LESS ANNUALISED TSR OF THE  
FTSE 350 REIT INDEX

AWARD VESTING CRITERIA

Less than 0% pa

0% pa

0%

25%

Between 0% pa and 5.5% pa

Pro-rata on a straight line basis 
between 25% and 100%

5.5% pa or more

100%

ANNUALISED NAV GROWTH LESS  
ANNUALISED RPI GROWTH

AWARD VESTING CRITERIA

Less than 3% pa

0%

25%

2   LTIP: Awards of nil cost options are made by the Committee at 125% of salary divided by 

3% pa

the average share price over five days prior to the date of grant. The face value is 
calculated using the average share price used to determine the number of shares 
awarded, being £9.026 (the average share price over the five days prior, up to and 
including 5.12.16). There is a three year performance period (targets below) with a two 
year post vesting holding period.

Between 3% pa and 7% pa

Pro-rata on a straight line basis 
between 25% and 100%

7% pa or more

100%

95

96

GOVERNANCE  ANNUAL REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 

Directors’ shareholdings and share scheme interests at 30 September 2017 (audited)

SHARES
OWNED OUTRIGHT

DEFERRED SHARES1

SHARES UNDER OPTION 
NOT VESTED AND SUBJECT 
TO PERFORMANCE  
CRITERIA1

SHARESAVE

SHAREHOLDING  
REQUIREMENT MET2

146,728

103,547

103,547

98,713

207,483

146,371

146,371

143,640

4,812

4,812

4,812

3,950

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR 

B BICKELL

S J QUAYLE

T J C WELTON

C P A WARD

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

J C NICHOLLS

J C LITTLE

H S RIVA

D C A MATHIAS

S E WALDEN

1,157,160

1,035,151

829,269

105,733

10,000

5,367

18,148

16,208

60,000

1  On exercise or vesting, deferred shares and LTIP nil cost options are subject to income tax and national insurance. The number that will actually be transferred will be reduced if directors 

sell sufficient shares to meet their income tax and employees’ national insurance liability.

2  For future executive director appointments, the equivalent of a shareholding of 200% of salary at date of appointment to the Board, to be accumulated over five years.  

There have been no changes in directors’ shareholdings between 30 September 2017 and the date of this report.

Additional details on the share awards summarised in this table are provided below, with further explanation on the operation of the plans set out in the 
Remuneration Policy table. 

1. DEFERRED ANNUAL SHARE BONUS SCHEME

ENTITLEMENT TO ORDINARY SHARES

MARKET PRICE  
ON DATE OF GRANT 
£

AT
1.10.2016

AWARDED 
IN YEAR1

DELIVERED 
IN YEAR

AT 
30.9.2017

B BICKELL

S J QUAYLE

T J C WELTON

C P A WARD

DATE OF GRANT

17.12.2013

22.12.2014

8.2.2016 

12.12.2016

17.12.2013

22.12.2014

8.2.2016

12.12.2016

17.12.2013

22.12.2014

8.2.2016

12.12.2016

17.12.2013

22.12.2014

8.2.2016

12.12.2016

There are 597,351 shares held in an employee benefit trust at 30 September 2017.

5.98

7.80

8.30

8.95

5.98

7.80

8.30

8.95

5.98

7.80

8.30

8.95

5.98

7.80

8.30

8.95

36,238

55,304

42,436

-

133,978

25,651

39,075

29,928

-

94,654

25,651

39,075

29,928

-

94,654

22,394

36,068

29,258

-

87,720

-

-

-

48,988

48,988

-

-

-

34,544

34,544

-

-

-

34,544

34,544

-

-

-

33,387

33,387

36,238

-

-

-

36,238

25,651

-

-

-

25,651

25,651

-

-

-

25,651

22,394

-

-

-

22,394

-

55,304

42,436

48,988

146,728

-

39,075

29,928

34,544

103,547

-

39,075

29,928

34,544

103,547

-

36,068

29,258

33,387

98,713

97

GOVERNANCE  ANNUAL REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

2. LTIP

MARKET
PRICE OF
SHARE ON
GRANT 
£

DATE 
OF  
GRANT

B BICKELL

20.12.2013

8.12.20141

8.2.20162

12.12.20162

S J QUAYLE 20.12.2013 

8.12.20141

8.2.20162

12.12.20162

TJC WELTON 20.12.2013

8.12.20141

8.2.20162

12.12.20162

CPA WARD

20.12.2013

8.12.20141

8.2.20162

12.12.20162

6.06

7.78

8.30

8.95

6.06

7.78

8.30

8.95

6.06

7.78

8.30

8.95

6.06

7.78

8.30

8.95

NUMBER OF ORDINARY SHARES UNDER OPTION

AT
1.10.2016

94,900

74,220

65,413

GRANTED
DURING 
YEAR

-

-

-

-

67,850

VESTED 
AND
EXERCISED
DURING 
YEAR

94,900

-

-

-

234,533

67,850

94,900

67,000

52,345

46,126

-

-

-

-

47,900

67,000

-

-

-

165,471

47,900

67,000

67,000

52,345

46,126

-

-

-

-

47,900

67,000

-

-

-

165,471

47,900

67,000

61,900

51,175

45,115

-

-

-

-

47,350

61,900

-

-

-

158,190

47,350

61,900

MARKET
PRICE OF 
SHARE ON 
DATE OF 
EXERCISE
£

LAPSED
DURING 
YEAR

AT
30.9.2017

PERFORMANCE  
PERIOD

EXERCISE 
PERIOD

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

8.91028 1.10.2013-30.9.2016 12.2016-6.2017

74,220

65,413

67,850

207,483

- 1.10.2014-30.9.2017 12.2017-6.2018

- 1.10.2015-30.9.2018 12.2020-6.2021

- 1.10.2016-30.9.2019 12.2021-6.2022

-

8.91028 1.10.2013-30.9.2016 12.2016-6.2017

52,345

46,126

47,900

146,371

- 1.10.2014-30.9.2017 12.2017-6.2018

- 1.10.2015-30.9.2018 12.2020-6.2021

- 1.10.2016-30.9.2019 12.2021-6.2022

-

8.91028 1.10.2013-30.9.2016 12.2016-6.2017

52,345

46,126

47,900

146,371

- 1.10.2014-30.9.2017 12.2017-6.2018

- 1.10.2015-30.9.2018 12.2020-6.2021

- 1.10.2016-30.9.2019 12.2021-6.2022

-

8.91028 1.10.2013-30.9.2016 12.2016-6.2017

51,175

45,115

47,350

143,640

- 1.10.2014-30.9.2017 12.2017-6.2018

- 1.10.2015-30.9.2018 12.2020-6.2021

- 1.10.2016-30.9.2019 12.2021-6.2022

1   The TSR and NAV performance conditions over the three years ended 30.9.2017 have been met in full and therefore all the nil cost options granted on 8.12.2014 will vest in December 2017.

2  Following approval of the Remuneration Policy at the 2016 AGM, options granted under 2016 LTIP rules include a two-year post-vesting holding period.  

98

GOVERNANCE  ANNUAL REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 

3. SHARESAVE
Options are granted at a 20% discount to the market price on date of grant up to the maximum monthly savings amount permitted by HMRC over three or five years. 

NUMBER OF ORDINARY SHARES UNDER OPTION

DATE 
OF GRANT

AT 
1.10.2016

GRANTED 
DURING 
YEAR

LAPSED
DURING 
YEAR

EXERCISED 
DURING
YEAR

AT 
30.9.2017

MARKET VALUE 
OF SHARE ON 
DATE OF  
EXERCISE
£

OPTION 
PRICE 
£

B BICKELL

2.7.2014

1.7.2016

S J QUAYLE

2.7.2014

1.7.2016

T J C WELTON

2.7.2014

1.7.2016

C P A WARD

5.7.2012

2.7.2014

30.6.2017

2,788

2,024

4,812

2,788

2,024

4,812

2,788

2,024

4,812

3,759

2,788

-

6,547

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1,162

1,162

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,759

-

-

3,759

2,788

2,024

4,812

2,788

2,024

4,812

2,788

2,024

4,812

-

2,788

1,162

3,950

5.38

7.41

5.38

7.41

5.38

7.41

3.99

5.38

7.74

EXERCISE
PERIOD

8.2019-1.2020

8.2021-1.2022

8.2019-1.2020

8.2021-1.2022

8.2019-1.2020

8.2021-1.2022

-

-

-

-

-

-

9.81

8.2017-1.2018

-

 -

8.2019-1.2020

8.2020-1.2021

Percentage change in Chief Executive remuneration compared to average percentage 
change in remuneration for all other employees 

CHIEF EXECUTIVE OTHER EMPLOYEES

CHANGE

CHANGE

RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF SPEND ON PAY

£44.6m

£41.2m

Base salary

Taxable benefits

Annual bonus

TOTAL

1.2%

0.6%

(7.4)%

(2.8)%

3.3%

3.0%

0.4%

2.1%

The analysis for other employees is based on a like-for-like group of  
employees, i.e. the same individuals appear in the 2016 and 2017  
figures and the 2016 comparatives have been restated on that basis.

£9.9m

£10.7m

2017

2016

Employee costs
Dividends

99

GOVERNANCE  ANNUAL REMUNERATION REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Review of past performance 
The chart below shows the TSR for the Company compared with the FTSE 350 REIT Index, of which the Company is a constituent, over nine years. The 
Committee uses this index as one measure of performance for awards of shares under the LTIP, as it considers this is an appropriate measure against which 
the relative performance of the Company should be compared for the purposes of considering executive directors’ remuneration. 

The table below the TSR chart details the Chief Executive’s single total figure of remuneration over the same period.

NINE-YEAR TSR CHART TO 30 SEPTEMBER 2017
Value of £100 invested at 30 September 2008

£400

£350

£300

£250

£200

£150

£100

£50

£0

£377

£149

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

Shaftesbury
FTSE 350  
REIT index

NINE-YEAR CHIEF EXECUTIVE SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION1

Chief Executive single total figure of remuneration 
(£’000)

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

850

1,013

1,650

1,198

1,075

1,455

1,523

1,954

1,825

Annual bonus payout2 (% maximum)

Long-term incentive award vesting (% maximum)

50%

50%

50%

90%

40%

50%

76.7%

100%

40%

50%

75%

60%

60%

55%

50%

63.5%

100%

100%

SHAREHOLDER VOTING 
At the 2017 AGM, there was an advisory vote on the Annual Remuneration Report. Voting by shareholders representing 72.37% of the issued share capital on 
the resolution was as follows: 

FOR

% FOR

AGAINST

% AGAINST

WITHHELD

TOTAL VOTES

Annual Remuneration Report

199,176,833

99.3

1,401,780

0.7

1,350,527

200,578,613

On behalf of the Board

Sally Walden 
Chairman - Remuneration Committee 

27 November 2017

1  2009-2011: Jonathan Lane, 2012-2017: Brian Bickell

2  Based on award in cash. See page 91 for details if award taken in shares

100

101

 Directors’
report 

The directors present their report and the audited  
consolidated financial statements for the year ended  
30 September 2017. 

Strategic report
For the review of the business and its likely future developments, see the 
Strategic Report on pages 1 to 64.

Results and dividends
The results for the year ended 30 September 2017 are set out in the Group 
Statement of Comprehensive Income on page 114.

An interim dividend of 7.9p per ordinary share was paid on 7 July 2017 (2016: 7.15p).

The directors recommend a final dividend in respect of the year ended 
30 September 2017 of 8.1p per ordinary share (2016: 7.55p), making a total 
dividend for the year of 16.0p per ordinary share (2016: 14.7p). If authorised 
at the 2018 AGM, the dividend will be paid on 16 February 2018 to members 
on the register at the close of business on 19 January 2018. The dividend will 
be paid as an ordinary dividend. 

Share capital
During the year, a total of 477,247 ordinary shares were issued at either nil 
cost on the exercise of LTIP options, or £6.94, £3.99 or £5.38 on the exercise 
of Sharesave options. At 30 September 2017, the Company’s issued share 
capital comprised 279,032,329 ordinary shares of 25p each. 

The Company has one class of ordinary shares. All shares rank equally and 
are fully paid. No person holds shares carrying special rights with regard to 
control of the Company. There are neither restrictions on the transfer of 
shares nor on the size of a holding, which are both governed by the Articles 
of Association and prevailing legislation. The directors are not aware of any 
agreements between holders of shares in the Company that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of shares or on voting rights.

Directors
The Company’s rules governing the appointment and replacement of 
directors are contained in its Articles of Association. Changes to the Articles 
of Association are only permitted in accordance with legislation and must be 
approved by a special resolution of shareholders.

Details of the directors of the Company who served during the year ended 
30 September 2017 and up to the date of the financial statements, their 
interests in the ordinary share capital of the Company and details of options 
granted under the Group’s share schemes are set out in the Annual 
Remuneration Report on pages 92 to 100. 

No member of the Board had a material interest in any contract of significance 
with the Company, or any of its subsidiaries, at any time during the year.

Going concern
The directors confirm they have a reasonable expectation that the Company 
has adequate resources to continue in operation for at least 12 months from 
the date of signing these financial statements.

Purchase of own shares
The Company was granted authority at the 2017 AGM to make market 
purchases of its own ordinary shares. This authority will expire at the 
conclusion of the 2018 AGM and a resolution will be proposed to seek 
further authority. No ordinary shares were purchased under this authority 
during the year or in the period from 1 October 2017 to 27 November 2017. 

Substantial shareholdings
At 27 November 2017, the Company had been notified, in accordance with 
the UK Listing Authority’s Disclosure Rules and Transparency Rules, that the 
following shareholders held, or were beneficially interested in, 3% or more 
of the Company’s issued share capital:

PEL Limited

Invesco Limited 

Norges Bank

BlackRock Inc

ISSUED SHARE CAPITAL 
%

25.02

9.99

8.94

6.67

Directors’ indemnities and directors’ 
and officers’ liability insurance 
The Company’s agreement to indemnify each director against any liability incurred 
in the course of their office to the extent permitted by law remains in force. 

The Group maintains Directors’ and Officers’ Liability Insurance. 

Financial instruments
See pages 129 to 132. 

Change of control
The Longmartin joint venture and a number of debt financing agreements 
contain clauses which take effect upon a change of control of the Group 
and may alter or terminate these agreements. 

The Group’s share schemes contain provisions relating to the vesting and 
exercising of options in the event of a change of control of the Group.

Authorisation of directors’  
conflicts of interests
Directors are required to notify the Company of any conflict or potential 
conflict of interest and make an annual declaration. The Board confirms that 
no conflicts have been identified or notified to the Company during the year 
and, accordingly, the Board has not authorised any conflicts of interest as 
permitted by the Company’s Articles of Association. 

102

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017GOVERNANCE  DIRECTORS’ REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 

Employment, human rights and  
environmental matters
See sustainability and stakeholders on pages 28 to 33 and the Nomination 
Committee report on pages 80 to 81.

Independent auditors
A resolution for the re-appointment of Ernst & Young LLP as auditors to the 
Company will be proposed at the 2018 AGM. The Board, on the advice of the 
Audit Committee, recommends their re-appointment. 

The chosen emissions intensity is common parts floor areas, which has been 
measured in 67 of the 125 (2016: 59 of 122) reported properties with 
common parts only and the emissions intensity figure has been obtained of 
49.5 kgCO2e/m2 (0.05 tonnes CO2e/m2), an increase over last year’s 37.3 
kgCO2e/m² (0.04 tonnes CO2e/m2). KWH (electricity) was 781,533 (2016: 
289,569).

By Order of the Board

Penny Thomas 
Company Secretary

2018 annual general meeting
The 2018 AGM will include resolutions dealing with authority to issue shares, 
disapplication of pre-emption rights, authority to purchase the Company’s 
own shares and authority to call a general meeting on not less than 14 days’ 
notice. The resolutions are set out in the Notice of Meeting, together with 
explanatory notes which are contained in a separate circular to shareholders 
which accompanies this Annual Report. 

Shaftesbury PLC  
Incorporated, registered and domiciled  
in England and Wales number 1999238 
22 Ganton Street 
Carnaby 
London W1F 7FD

27 November 2017

Disclosure of information to auditors
Each director has confirmed that:

a)  so far as they are aware, there is no relevant audit information of which 

the Company’s auditors are unaware; and

b)  they have taken all the steps that they ought to have taken as a director in 
order to make themselves aware of any relevant audit information and to 
establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of that information.

This confirmation is given in accordance with section 418 of the Companies 
Act 2006.

Greenhouse gas reporting 
We report our greenhouse gas emissions in accordance with UK legislation. 
The figures relate to landlord controlled common parts such as staircases. 
The numbers are therefore minimal. 

Overall, energy consumption has increased by a small amount. Due to the 
increased use of renewable energy in the national grid, greenhouse gas 
emissions in the portfolio decreased by 18% from 1,565.5 tonnes to  
1,288 tonnes. 

ABSOLUTE SCOPE 1 AND 2 GHG EMISSIONS1

SCOPE 1

Total tCO2e

SCOPE 2

Total tCO2e

2017

207

2017

906

2016-2017 
CHANGE

-45%

2016

375

2016-2017  
CHANGE

2016

1,018

-11%

1   For the reporting year we have again followed the UK Government environmental reporting guidance and used the 2017 UK Government’s Conversion Factors for Company Reporting. 
Greenhouse gas emissions are reported using the following parameters to determine what is included within the reporting boundaries in terms of landlord and tenant consumption:
 Scope 1 – direct emissions includes whole building gas data. Fugitive emissions from air conditioning are included where it is the landlord’s responsibility within the common parts.  
There are no company vehicles to report within Scope 1.
 Scope 2 – indirect energy emissions includes purchased electricity for the head office and landlord controlled common parts areas and a small number of buildings where  
the occupied areas and common parts are on the same meter. Electricity used in refurbishment projects has also been recorded. 

103

 
 
 Directors’ 
 responsibilities

The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report, 
the Remuneration Report and the financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors to prepare financial statements for each 
financial year. Under that law the directors have prepared the Group and 
Company financial statements in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. Under company 
law the directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group 
and the Company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. In 
preparing these financial statements, the directors are required to:

•   select suitable accounting policies in accordance with IAS 8 ‘accounting 

policies, changes in accounting estimates and errors’ and then apply them 
consistently;

•   make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent;

•   state that the Group and Company has complied with IFRSs as adopted by 
the European Union, subject to any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the financial statements; and

•   prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it  

is inappropriate to do so.

Directors’ responsibility statement under 
the Disclosure and Transparency Rules
Each of the directors, whose names and functions are listed on pages 68 to 
69 confirm that, to the best of their knowledge:

•   the Group and Company financial statements, which have been prepared 

in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU, give a true and fair view of 
the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Group; and

•   the Strategic Report contained on pages 1 to 64 of the Annual Report 
includes a fair review of the development and performance of the 
business and the position of the Group and Company, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that it faces.

Directors’ statement under the  
UK Corporate Governance Code
The Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Group’s performance, business model and strategy. 

 The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that 
are sufficient to show and explain the Group’s and Company’s transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of 
the Company and the Group and enable them to ensure that the financial 
statements and the Remuneration Report comply with the Companies Act 
2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the 
Company and the Group and hence for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the 
Company’s website. 

Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other 
jurisdictions. 

Each of the directors confirm that to the best of their knowledge the Annual 
Report:

•   presents information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides 

relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information; and

•   provides additional disclosures when compliance with the specific 

requirements of IFRSs is insufficient to enable users to understand the 
impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the 
Group’s and Company’s financial position and performance.

 A copy of the financial statements of the Group is placed on the Company’s 
website.

Information published on the internet is accessible in many countries with 
different legal requirements.

This responsibility statement was approved by the Board and signed on its 
behalf by:

Brian Bickell 
Chief Executive 

27 November 2017   

Chris Ward 
Finance Director

27 November 2017

104

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
 
 
 
 
 Independent 
 auditor’s report
to the members of Shaftesbury PLC 

Our opinion on the financial statements
In our opinion:
•    Shaftesbury PLC’s Group financial statements and Parent company 

(‘Company’) financial statements (the ‘financial statements’) give a true 
and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Company’s affairs as at 
30 September 2017 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

•    The Group financial statements have been properly prepared in 

accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as 
adopted by the European Union; 

•    The Company financial statements have been properly prepared in 

accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union as applied in 
accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

•    The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 2006, and, as regards the Group 
financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

What we have audited
Shaftesbury PLC’s financial statements at 30 September 2017 comprise:

Balance sheet 

Statement of comprehensive income 

Cash flow statement 

Statement of changes in equity 

Related notes 1 to 26, including a summary of significant 
accounting policies

GROUP COMPANY

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation 
is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union. The Company 
financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as 
adopted by the European Union and as applied in accordance with the 
provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing 
(UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards 
are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements section of our report below. We are independent of 
the Group and Company in accordance with the ethical requirements that 
are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the 
FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we 
have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these 
requirements.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and 
appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Conclusions relating to principal risks, 
going concern and viability statement
We have nothing to report in respect of the following information in the 
annual report, in relation to which the ISAs (UK) require us to report to you 
whether we have anything material to add or draw attention to:

•    the disclosures in the annual report set out on pages 61 to 63 that 

describe the principal risks and explain how they are being managed or 
mitigated;

•    the directors’ confirmation set out on page 60 in the annual report that 

they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the 
entity, including those that would threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity;

•    the directors’ statement set out on page 118 in the financial statements 

about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting in preparing them, and their identification of any 
material uncertainties to the entity’s ability to continue to do so over a 
period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial 
statements;

•    whether the directors’ statement in relation to going concern required 

under the Listing Rules in accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6R(3) is 
materially inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit; or 

•    the directors’ explanation set out on page 64 in the annual report as to 

how they have assessed the prospects of the entity, over what period they 
have done so and why they consider that period to be appropriate, and 
their statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the 
entity will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they 
fall due over the period of their assessment, including any related 
disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or 
assumptions.

105

GOVERNANCE  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
 
GOVERNANCE  INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Overview of our audit approach

Key Audit 
Matters

Audit scope

• The valuation of investment property (including properties within the Longmartin joint venture)

• Revenue recognition including the timing of revenue recognition, and the treatment of rents and incentives

The Group operates in London’s West End and consists of a single reportable segment across eleven statutory entities. All of the 
Group’s companies were included in the scope of the audit. The Group audit team performed direct testing of the Longmartin joint 
venture balances which are included in the Group.

Materiality

• Overall Group materiality: £36m which represents 1% of total assets.

•  Specific Group materiality: £3.7m which represents 5% of operating profit before investment property valuation movements and 

net finance costs.

Key Audit Matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the current period 
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which 
had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters 
were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on 
these matters.

RISK

OUR RESPONSE TO THE RISK

Risk: The valuation of investment property 
£3,407m (plus £231m being the Group’s share in 
the Longmartin joint venture)

Refer to the Audit Committee Report (pages 82 
to 84); Accounting policies (page 120); and Note 9 
of the Consolidated Financial Statements (pages 
123 to 124)

The valuation of investment property (including 
properties held in the joint venture) requires 
significant judgement and estimates by management 
and the external valuers. Any input inaccuracies 
or unreasonable bases used in these judgements 
(such as in respect of estimated rental value and 
yield profile applied) could result in a material 
misstatement of the statement of comprehensive 
income and balance sheet.

There is also a risk that management may 
unduly influence the significant judgements 
and estimates in respect of property valuations 
in order to achieve property valuation and 
other performance targets to meet market 
expectations or bonus targets.

Our audit procedures around the valuation of investment property included:

•  We understood and assessed the design and implementation of the 
Group’s controls over data used in the valuation of the investment 
property portfolio and management’s review of the valuations.

•  We evaluated the competence of the external valuers which included 
consideration of their qualifications and expertise, as well as their 
independence.

•  We performed testing over the inputs to the valuations. For a sample 
of properties we tested the contracted rent and key lease terms by 
agreeing this back to lease agreements. 

16%

   Fair value of investment  
properties tested by audit  
team Chartered Surveyors
   Fair value of investment  
properties subject to  
analytical procedures

84%

KEY OBSERVATIONS  
COMMUNICATED TO THE  
AUDIT COMMITTEE

We have audited the inputs, 
assumptions and review the 
methodology used by the external 
valuers. We conclude that the 
inputs and methodology applied are 
reasonable and that the external 
valuations are an appropriate 
assessment of the fair value of 
investment properties at 30 
September 2017.

We did not identify any exceptions 
or material errors in the input 
testing for the sample we tested.

We conclude that the valuation of 
each of the assets in the sample 
tested by our Chartered Surveyors 
are within a reasonable range.

We conclude that management 
provided an appropriate level of 
review and challenge over the 
valuations but we did not identify 
evidence of undue management 
influence.

•  The Group audit team includes Chartered Surveyors who tested a sample of 
properties. They challenged the valuation approach and assumptions. The 
sample size they tested accounted for 84% of the fair value of investment 
properties (including investment properties held in the Longmartin joint 
venture). Our Chartered Surveyors compared the equivalent yields applied 
to each property to an expected range of yields taking into account market 
data and asset specific considerations. They also considered whether the 
other assumptions applied by the external valuers, such as the estimated 
rental values, tenant incentives and development costs to complete were 
supported by available data such as recent lettings and occupancy levels.

106

GOVERNANCE  INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

RISK

OUR RESPONSE TO THE RISK

KEY OBSERVATIONS  
COMMUNICATED TO THE  
AUDIT COMMITTEE

•  Together with our Chartered Surveyors, we met with the external 

valuers to discuss the findings from our audit work described above 
and to seek further explanations as required. We also discussed the 
impact of current market conditions on the property valuations.

•  In respect of the properties not in the sample tested by our Chartered 

Surveyors (16% of the fair value), we performed detailed analytical 
procedures on a property-by-property basis. This involved forming 
an expectation of the fair value of each property in the portfolio by 
reference to relevant external market data relating to capital growth 
rates. We investigated further the valuations of those properties which 
were not in line with our initial expectations which included further 
discussions with management and the external valuers and, where 
appropriate, involvement of our Chartered Surveyors. 

•  We made enquiries of the external valuers and inspected their terms 
of reference to confirm that they had not been subject to undue 
influence or direction from management.

•  We utilised our detailed analytical procedures and work of the 

Chartered Surveyors described above in order to assess for evidence 
of undue management influence.

•  We performed site visits accompanied by our Chartered Surveyors for 
a sample of properties (focusing primarily on development properties) 
which enabled us to assess the stage of completion of, and gain 
specific insights into, these refurbishments/developments.

•  For development appraisals, we vouched the costs incurred to date, 
and agreed the cost to complete estimates to approved budgets and 
contractual arrangements.

•  We performed detailed testing for a sample of leases by agreeing 

the annual rent back to the terms of the lease agreements.

•  For a sample of leases, we tested that the lease income, including 
the treatment of lease incentives, is on a straight-line basis, and in 
accordance with SIC-15 Operating Leases – Incentives.

•  We performed substantive analytical procedures and found that 
the revenue recognised by the Group and each of the operating 
companies was materially consistent with our expectations 
developed from rents in the tenancy schedules.

•  We assessed whether the revenue recognition policies adopted 

complied with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union.

•  We performed audit procedures specifically designed to address the 

risk of management override of controls including journal entry testing 
to confirm the processing and timing of journals to record revenue is 
consistent with our expectations.

Risk: Revenue recognition, including the 
timing of revenue recognition, and the 
treatment of rents and incentives
£103m of rents receivable (FY16: £98m)

Refer to the Audit Committee Report (pages 
82 to 84); Accounting policies (page 119); 
and Note 2 of the Consolidated Financial 
Statements (page 121)
Market expectations and profit based targets 
may place pressure on management to distort 
revenue recognition. This may result in 
overstatement or deferral of revenues to 
assist in meeting current or future targets or 
expectations.

In order to distort rental income, 
management could manipulate the deferred 
revenue balance or the IFRS rent adjustment 
for lease incentives.

We audited the timing of revenue 
recognition, treatment of rents 
and incentives, and assessed 
the risk of management override. 
Based upon the audit procedures 
performed, we conclude that 
revenue has been recognised 
on an appropriate basis in 
the year.

107

GOVERNANCE  INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

An Overview of the scope of our audit 
Our assessment of audit risk, our evaluation of materiality and our allocation of performance materiality determine our audit scope for each entity within the 
Group. Taken together, this enables us to form an opinion on the consolidated financial statements. We take into account size, risk profile, the organisation 
of the group, effectiveness of group-wide controls and changes in the business environment when assessing the level of work to be performed at each entity.

Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality in planning and performing the audit, in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on the audit and in forming 
our audit opinion. 

The table below sets out the materiality, performance materiality and threshold for reporting audit differences applied on our audit:

Overall 

Specific 

Applicable for account balances not related to investment 
properties, loans & borrowings and derivatives

BASIS

1% of total assets

5% of operating profit before 
investment property valuation 
movements and net finance costs

MATERIALITY

PERFORMANCE  
MATERIALITY

AUDIT  
DIFFERENCES

£36.0m

£3.7m

£27.0m

£2.8m

£1.8m

£0.2m

Materiality
The magnitude of an omission or misstatement that, individually or in the 
aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of the users of the financial statements. Materiality provides a 
basis for determining the nature and extent of our audit procedures.

Performance materiality
The application of materiality at the individual account or balance level. 
It is set at an amount to reduce to an appropriately low level the 
probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected 
misstatements exceeds materiality.

When establishing our overall audit strategy, we determined a magnitude of 
uncorrected misstatements that we judged would be material for the 
financial statements as a whole. We determined that total assets would be 
the most appropriate basis for determining overall materiality given that key 
users of the Group’s financial statements are primarily focussed on the 
valuation of the Group’s assets; primarily the investment property portfolio. 
This provided a basis for determining the nature, timing and extent of risk 
assessment procedures, identifying and assessing the risk of material 
misstatement and determining the nature, timing and extent of further audit 
procedures. For planning purposes this was initially based on the total assets 
as at 30 September 2016. 

On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the 
Group’s overall control environment, our judgement is that overall 
performance materiality and specific performance materiality (i.e. our 
tolerance for misstatement in an individual account or balance) for the 
Group should be 75% (2016: 50%) of the respective materiality. We have 
increased our set performance materiality from 50% to 75% in the current 
year due to few uncorrected adjustments being identified in the 2016 audit, 
and no weaknesses being identified in our walk-through testing of key 
control processes. Our objective in adopting this approach is to confirm that 
total detected and undetected audit differences do not exceed our 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole.

We assessed that for account balances not related to investment properties 
(either wholly owned or within the joint venture), loans & borrowings and 
derivatives, a misstatement of less than overall materiality for the financial 
statements could influence the economic decisions of users. We have 
determined that specific materiality for these areas should be based on 
operating profit before investment property valuation movements and net 
finance costs. We believe that it is appropriate to use a profit-based 
measure for specific materiality as profit is also a focus of users of the 
financial statements. 

During the course of our audit, we reassessed initial materiality and, as the 
actual value of total assets increased from that which we had used as the 
initial basis for determining overall materiality (primarily due to the increase 
in property valuations from the annual revaluation), we increased our 
materiality threshold to £36.0m, as noted in the table above, which 
represents 1.0% of total assets of £3.6bn as at 30 September 2017.

In the prior year audit we adopted an overall materiality of £33.0m based on 
1% of total assets. We also applied a specific materiality of £3.9m based on 
5% of operating profit before investment property valuation movements 
and net finance costs.

108

Reporting threshold
An amount below which identified misstatements are considered as being 
clearly trivial.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the 
Committee any uncorrected audit differences on investment property 
valuations in excess of £1.8m, as well as uncorrected audit differences in 
excess of £0.2m that relate to our specific testing of the other account 
balances not related to investment properties, loans & borrowings and 
derivatives. These are set at 5% of their respective planning materiality. We 
also agreed to report differences below that threshold that, in our view, 
warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

We evaluate any uncorrected misstatements against both the quantitative 
measures of materiality discussed above and in light of other relevant 
qualitative considerations in forming our opinion.

GOVERNANCE  INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Other information 
The other information comprises the information included in the annual 
report including the Strategic report Overview, Strategic report Annual 
Review, Governance and Other information (including Shareholder 
information, Portfolio analysis, Basis of valuation, Summary report by the 
valuers, Sustainability and the Glossary of terms) set out on pages 1 to 104 
and 139 to 147, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report 
thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other 
information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this 
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is 
to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other 
information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our 
knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially 
misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material 
misstatements, we are required to determine whether there is a material 
misstatement in the financial statements or a material misstatement of the 
other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude 
that there is a material misstatement of the other information, we are 
required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.
In this context, we also have nothing to report in regard to our responsibility 
to specifically address the following items in the other information and to 
report as uncorrected material misstatements of the other information 
where we conclude that those items meet the following conditions:

•    Fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 104 – the statement 
given by the directors that they consider the annual report and financial 
statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and strategy, is materially inconsistent with 
our knowledge obtained in the audit; or 

•    Audit Committee reporting set out on pages 82 to 84 – the section 
describing the work of the audit committee does not appropriately 
address matters communicated by us to the Audit Committee is materially 
inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit; or

•    Directors’ statement of compliance with the UK Corporate Governance 
Code set out on page 74 – the parts of the directors’ statement required 
under the Listing Rules relating to the Company’s compliance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code containing provisions specified for review by 
the auditor in accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.10R (2) do not properly 
disclose a departure from a relevant provision of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by 
the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be 
audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies 
Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•   the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for 

the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is 
consistent with the financial statements and those reports have been 
prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements;

•   the information about internal control and risk management systems in 

relation to financial reporting processes and about share capital 
structures, given in compliance with rules 7.2.5 and 7.2.6 in the Disclosure 
Rules and Transparency Rules sourcebook made by the Financial Conduct 
Authority (the FCA Rules), is consistent with the financial statements and 
has been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements; and

•   information about the Company’s corporate governance code and 

practices and about its administrative, management and supervisory 
bodies and their committees complies with rules 7.2.2, 7.2.3 and 7.2.7 of 
the FCA Rules.

Matters on which we are required to 
report by exception
In light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the Company 
and its environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not 
identified material misstatements in:

•  the strategic report or the directors’ report; or

•   the information about internal control and risk management systems in 

relation to financial reporting processes and about share capital 
structures, given in compliance with rules 7.2.5 and 7.2.6 of the FCA Rules

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to 
which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our 
opinion:

•   adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Company, or 

returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not 
visited by us; or

•   the Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ 

Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the 
accounting records and returns; or

•   certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not 

made; or

•   we have not received all the information and explanations we require for 

our audit

•   a Corporate Governance Statement has not been prepared by the Company

109

GOVERNANCE  INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

•   We assessed the susceptibility of the Group’s financial statements to 

material misstatement, including how fraud might occur by reviewing the 
Company’s risk register, enquiry with management and the Audit 
Committee during the planning and execution phases of our audit. 

•   Based on this understanding we designed our audit procedures to identify 
non-compliance with such laws and regulations. Our procedures involved 
the following:

  -  Inquire of members of senior management, and when appropriate, 
those charged with governance regarding their knowledge of any 
non-compliance or potential non-compliance with laws and regulations 
that could affect the financial statements.

  -  Reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance. 
  -  Obtaining and reading correspondence from legal and regulatory bodies 

including HRMC. 

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in 
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit 
work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s 
members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s 
report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we 
do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company 
and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, 
or for the opinions we have formed.  

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements is located on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at 
https://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part 
of our auditor’s report.

Other matters we are required to 
address
•    We were appointed by the Company on 15 October 2015 to audit the 

financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2016 and 
subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted 
engagement including previous renewals and reappointments is 2 years, 
covering the years ending 30 September 2016 to 30 September 2017. Our 
audit engagement letter was refreshed on 30 October 2017.

•    The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not 
provided to the Group or the Company and we remain independent of the 
Group and the Company in conducting the audit.  

•    The audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit 

Committee.

Eamonn McGrath  
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor

London 
27 November 2017

Responsibilities of directors 
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on 
page 104 the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view in 
accordance, and for such internal control as the directors determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free 
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for 
assessing the Group and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the 
going concern basis of accounting unless management either intends to 
liquidate the Group or the Company or to cease operations, or has no 
realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit 
of the financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the 
financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, 
whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes 
our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a 
guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always 
detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from 
fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, 
they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of 
users taken on the basis of these financial statements.  

Explanation as to what extent the audit 
was considered capable of detecting 
irregularities, including fraud
The objectives of our audit, in respect to fraud, are; to identify and assess 
the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements due to fraud; 
to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the assessed risks 
of material misstatement due to fraud, through designing and implementing 
appropriate responses; and to respond appropriately to fraud or suspected 
fraud identified during the audit. However, the primary responsibility for the 
prevention and detection of fraud rests with both those charged with 
governance of the entity and management. 

Our approach was as follows: 
•   We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that 

are applicable to the Group and determined that the most significant 
frameworks which are directly relevant to specific assertions in the 
financial statements are those that relate to the reporting framework 
(IFRS, the Companies Act 2006 and UK Corporate Governance Code) and 
the relevant tax regulations in the United Kingdom, including the UK REIT 
regulations. 

•   We understood how the Company is complying with those frameworks 
through enquiry with management, and by identifying the Company’s 
policies and procedures regarding compliance with laws and regulations. 
We also identified those members of management who have the primary 
responsibility for ensuring compliance with laws and regulations, and for 
reporting any known instances of non-compliance to those charged with 
governance. 

1.   The maintenance and integrity of the Shaftesbury PLC website is the responsibility of the 
directors; the work carried out by the auditors does not involve consideration of these 
matters and, accordingly, the auditors accept no responsibility for any changes that may 
have occurred to the financial statements since they were initially presented on the 
website.

2.  Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 

statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

110

 
111

Financial statements

112

Financial statements

113

Group statement of com-

prehensive income

Group statement
of comprehensive income

For the year ended 30 September 2017

Revenue 

Property charges

Net property income

Administrative expenses

Annual bonuses

Equity-settled remuneration

Total administrative expenses

Operating profit before investment property disposals and valuation movements

Profit on disposal of investment properties

Net surplus on revaluation of investment properties

Operating profit

Finance income

Finance costs

Recognition of fair value of Debenture Stock

Change in fair value of derivative financial instruments

Net finance costs

Share of post-tax profit from joint venture

Profit before tax

Tax charge for the year

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year

Earnings per share:

Basic

Diluted

EPRA

Please see page 140 for an explanation of the EPRA measures used in these financial statements.

NOTES

2

3

5

6

9

4

7

16

17

11

8

24

2017
£M

111.5

(23.2)

88.3

(9.6)

(2.7)

(1.8)

(14.1)

74.2

1.1

230.6

305.9

0.1

(32.8)

-

22.0

(10.7)

6.4

301.6

-

301.6

108.1p

107.9p

16.2p

2016
£M

106.2

(22.1)

84.1

(8.6)

(3.0)

(2.5)

(14.1)

70.0

-

108.3

178.3

0.1

(33.7)

(29.2)

(34.9)

(97.7)

18.5

99.1

-

99.1

35.6p

35.5p

14.0p

114

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Balance sheets

As at 30 September 2017

Group statement of com-

prehensive income

Non-current assets

Investment properties

Accrued income

Investment in joint venture

Property, plant and equipment

Other receivables

Investment in subsidiaries 

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Borrowings

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings

Derivative financial instruments

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity

Share capital

Share premium

Share-based payments reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity

Net asset value per share:

Basic

Diluted

EPRA

GROUP

NOTES

2017
£M

2016
£M

COMPANY

AS RESTATED
2016
£M

2017
£M

9

10

11

14

12

13

14

15

16

16

17

18

19

19

19

24

3,407.3

3,111.6

9.5

148.0

1.2

3.7

-

9.8

146.4

1.4

3.7

-

3,569.7

3,272.9

22.0

45.6

19.3

15.6

-

-

59.0

1.2

-

619.6

679.8

484.3

25.8

-

-

59.0

1.4

-

754.7

815.1

770.6

0.5

3,637.3

3,307.8

1,189.9

1,586.2

41.6

-

948.8

-

990.4

45.3

92.2

669.1

114.1

920.7

106.6

-

(0.8)

-

105.8

22.7

92.2

289.0

114.1

518.0

2,646.9

2,387.1

1,084.1

1,068.2

69.8

124.9

3.0

886.4

69.7

124.8

3.6

870.1

1,084.1

1,068.2

69.8

124.9

3.0

2,449.2

2,646.9

£9.49

£9.46

£9.52

69.7

124.8

3.6

2,189.0

2,387.1

£8.57

£8.54

£8.88

The Company made a profit of £57.7 million (2016: £282.9 million) in the year. See notes 13 and 15 for information on the reclassification of amounts due 
from/to subsidiaries in the Company financial statements. 

On behalf of the Board who approved and authorised for issue the financial statements on pages 114 to 138 on 27 November 2017.

Brian Bickell  
Chief Executive 

Chris Ward 
Finance Director

115

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
 
Cash flow statements

Cash flow 
statements 
For the year ended 30 September 2017

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash generated from operating activities

Interest received

Interest paid

Net cash generated from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Investment property acquisitions

Investment property disposals

Capital expenditure on investment properties

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Dividends received from joint venture

Decrease in loans to joint venture

Decrease in loans to subsidiaries

Increase in loans to subsidiaries

Acquisition of subsidiary

Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from exercise of share options

Proceeds from borrowings

Repayment of borrowings

Proceeds from issue of mortgage bonds

Repayment of debenture stock

Mortgage bond issue costs

Termination of derivative financial instruments

Equity dividends paid

Net cash from financing activities

Net change in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 October

Cash and cash equivalents at 30 September

GROUP

AS RESTATED
2016
£M

2017
£M

COMPANY

AS RESTATED
2016 
£M

2017
£M

76.7

0.1

(32.8)

44.0

(40.1)

13.4

(41.5)

(0.1)

4.8

-

-

-

-

74.6

0.1

(32.7)

42.0

(59.7)

-

(29.2)

(0.3)

1.7

0.5

-

-

-

(63.5)

(87.0)

0.1

146.5

(437.2)

493.2

(10.4)

(6.1)

(92.1)

(44.5)

49.5

30.0

15.6

45.6

0.1

114.5

(23.5)

-

-

-

-

(38.2)

52.9

7.9

7.7

15.6

(13.8)

0.1

(11.1)

(24.8)

-

-

-

(0.1)

4.8

-

575.2

(82.4)

(9.8)

487.7

0.1

146.5

(437.2)

-

(10.4)

-

(92.1)

(44.5)

(437.6)

25.3

0.5

25.8

(11.0)

0.1

(18.0)

(28.9)

-

-

-

(0.3)

1.7

0.5

76.6

(93.0)

(1.7)

(16.2)

0.1

107.2

(23.5)

-

-

-

-

(38.2)

45.6

0.5

-

0.5

NOTES

22

6

16

16

17

21

14

14

The prior year comparatives have been restated in the Company cash flow statement, to present movements in loans to subsidiaries on a gross basis and in 
the Group cash flow statement, to reclassify £2.3 million between cash generated from operating activities and cash used for investment property 
acquisitions. In both cases, the directors consider the restatements more fairly present the cash flows for the Group and Company. These changes have no 
impact on the net change in cash and cash equivalents, net assets or reported results in either of the years presented. 

116

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Statements 
of changes in equity

For the year ended 30 September 2017

Statements of changes in 

equity

Group

At 1 October 2015

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year

Transactions with owners:

Dividends paid

Exercise of share options

Fair value of share-based payments

Release on exercise of share options

At 30 September 2016

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year

Transactions with owners:

Dividends paid 

Exercise of share options

Fair value of share-based payments

Release on exercise of share options

At 30 September 2017

Company

At 1 October 2015

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Transactions with owners:

Dividends paid 

Exercise of share options

Fair value of share-based payments

Release on exercise of share options

At 30 September 2016

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Transactions with owners:

Dividends paid 

Exercise of share options

Fair value of share-based payments

Release on exercise of share options

At 30 September 2017

SHARE  
CAPITAL
£M

SHARE
PREMIUM
£M

SHARE-BASED
PAYMENTS
RESERVE
£M

NOTES

RETAINED
EARNINGS
£M

TOTAL  
EQUITY
£M

69.6

124.7

4.0

2,127.1

2,325.4

-

-

0.1

-

-

-

-

0.1

-

-

69.7

124.8

-

-

0.1

-

-

-

-

0.1

-

-

69.8

124.9

-

-

-

1.9

(2.3)

3.6

-

-

-

1.4

(2.0)

3.0

99.1

99.1

(39.4)

(0.1)

-

2.3

(39.4)

0.1

1.9

-

2,189.0

2,387.1

301.6

301.6

(43.3)

(0.1)

-

2.0

(43.3)

0.1

1.4

-

2,449.2

2,646.9

69.6

124.7

4.0

-

-

0.1

-

-

-

-

0.1

-

-

69.7

124.8

-

-

0.1

-

-

-

-

0.1

-

-

69.8

124.9

-

-

-

1.9

(2.3)

3.6

-

-

-

1.4

(2.0)

3.0

624.4

282.9

(39.4)

(0.1)

-

2.3

870.1

57.7

(43.3)

(0.1)

-

2.0

822.7

282.9

(39.4)

0.1

1.9

-

1,068.2

57.7

(43.3)

0.1

1.4

-

886.4

1,084.1

117

21

18

5

21

18

5

21

18

5

21

18

5

The Company’s distributable reserves are disclosed in note 19 to the financial statements.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Notes to the financial 

statements

Notes to the 
financial statements

For the year ended 30 September 2017

1 Accounting policies

Basis of preparation
Shaftesbury PLC (the Company) is a public limited company which is listed on the London Stock Exchange and is incorporated and domiciled in the UK. The 
address of the registered office is given on page 103. The Company is the ultimate parent company of the Shaftesbury PLC Group (the Group). The Company 
has not presented its own Statement of Comprehensive Income, as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006. The Company made a profit of 
£57.7 million (2016: £282.9 million) in the year. 

These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the European Union, IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) and 
those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS. The financial statements have been prepared in Pounds Sterling and 
under the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of investment properties and derivative financial instruments. 

Going concern
The Group’s business activities, together with the factors affecting performance, financial position and future development are set out in the Strategic 
Report on pages 1 to 64. The financial position of the Group including cash flow, liquidity, borrowings, undrawn facilities and debt maturity analysis is set out 
on pages 54 to 57. The directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for at least 12 
months from the date these financial statements were approved. Therefore, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial 
statements.

Critical judgements, assumptions and estimates
The Group’s significant accounting policies are stated below. Not all of these significant accounting policies require the directors to make difficult, subjective 
or complex judgements or estimates. However, the directors consider the valuation of investment properties to be critical because of the level of 
complexity, judgement or estimation involved and its impact on the financial statements. These judgements involve assumptions or estimates in respect of 
future events. Actual results may differ from these estimates.

The Group’s wholly-owned portfolio is valued by its external valuers, Cushman & Wakefield. Knight Frank LLP value the investment properties owned by the 
Longmartin joint venture. The valuations are used as the basis for the fair value of investment properties. 

The valuation of the Group’s property portfolio is inherently subjective due to, among other factors, the individual nature of each property, its location and 
the expected future rental income. As a result, the valuations the Group places on its property portfolio are subject to a degree of uncertainty and are 
made on the basis of assumptions which may not prove to be accurate, particularly in periods of volatility or low transaction flow in the commercial 
property market. Cushman & Wakefield and Knight Frank LLP make a number of assumptions in forming their opinion on the valuation of our investment 
properties, which are detailed in the Basis of Valuation on pages 142 to 143. These assumptions are in accordance with the RICS Valuation - Global 
Standards. However, if any assumptions made by the external valuers prove to be incorrect, this may mean that the value of the Group’s properties differs 
from their valuation reported in the financial statements, which could have a material effect on the Group’s financial position. See note 9 for further 
information.

New accounting standards and interpretations 
a)  

 The following amendments to existing Standards and Interpretations were relevant to the Group and mandatory for the first time for the financial year 
ended 30 September 2017:

STANDARD OR INTERPRETATION

Annual Improvements 2012-2014 

Amendments to IFRS 11 Joint arrangements on acquisition of an interest in a joint operation 

Amendments to IAS 16 and IAS 38 on depreciation and amortisation 

Amendments to IAS 27 Separate financial statements on equity accounting 

Amendments to IFRS 10, 12 and IAS 28 on consolidation for investment entities

Amendments to IAS 1 Presentation of financial statements disclosure initiative 

No material changes to accounting policies arose as a result of these amendments.

118

EFFECTIVE FROM

1 January 2016

1 January 2016

1 January 2016

1 January 2016

1 January 2016

1 January 2016

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Notes to the 

financial statements

For the year ended 30 September 2017

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

1 Accounting policies continued

b) 

 The following new Standards and amendments to existing Standards are relevant to the Group, are not yet effective in the year ended 30 September 
2017 and are not expected to have a significant impact on the Group’s financial statements:

STANDARD OR INTERPRETATION

Amendments to IAS 7 Statement of cash flows - disclosure initiative

Amendments to IFRS 2 Classification of share-based payment transactions

IFRS 9 Financial instruments

IFRS 15 Revenue from contracts with customers

IFRS 16 Leases 

EFFECTIVE FROM

1 January 2017

1 January 2018

1 January 2018

1 January 2018

1 January 2019

IFRS 9 – Financial Instruments
This standard deals with, amongst other things, the classification and measurement of financial instruments. Having carried out an assessment of the 
standard, the Group believes the main impact will be the measurement and presentation of trade receivables in the Group financial statements, and 
balances due from subsidiaries in the Company financial statements. Having considered expected credit losses and sources of forward-looking data, we do 
not currently expect any impact will be material.

IFRS 15 – Revenue from contracts with customers
This standard is based on the principle that revenue is recognised when control passes to a customer. In our case, the standard is most applicable to the 
recognition point for service charge income and disposals of investment properties. As the standard excludes rental income, which falls within the scope of 
IFRS 16 – Leases, it is not expected that IFRS 15 will have a significant impact on the Group’s financial statements. There may be changes to presentation and 
disclosure.

IFRS 16 - Leases
For operating leases in excess of one year, this standard requires lessees to recognise a right-of-use asset and a related lease liability representing the 
obligation to make lease payments. The right-of-use asset is assessed for impairment annually and is amortised on a straight-line basis. The lease liability is 
amortised using the effective interest method. Lessor accounting is substantially unchanged from current accounting. Therefore, since the Group is 
primarily a lessor, this standard does not significantly impact the Group’s financial statements. However, for the Company, it will result in the recognition of a 
right-to-use asset and corresponding lease liability, which we estimate at approximately £3 million, in the year when the standard becomes effective.

c)   There are no other Standards or Interpretations that are not yet effective that would be expected to have a material impact on the Group.

Basis of consolidation
The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of the Company and its subsidiaries.

Subsidiaries are those entities controlled by the Company. Control exists when the Company is exposed to variable returns and has the ability to affect 
those returns through its power over the entity. All intercompany transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation. The accounting policies of the 
subsidiaries are consistent with those adopted by the Group.

In the Company’s Balance Sheet, investments in subsidiaries are included at cost less any provision in respect of impairment loss.

Net property income
Revenue comprises rents receivable from tenants under operating leases, recognised on an accruals basis, and recoverable expenses incurred on behalf of 
tenants, where the Group acts as principal. Rents are recognised on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Value added tax is excluded from all 
amounts. Income arising as a result of rent reviews is recognised when agreement of new terms is reasonably certain.

Premiums receivable from tenants to surrender their lease obligations are recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

The cost of any incentives given to lessees to enter into leases is spread on a straight-line basis over the non-cancellable period of the lease, being the 
earlier of its expiry date or the date of the first break option. Lease incentives are usually in the form of rent-free periods. 

Irrecoverable property costs are charged to the Statement of Comprehensive Income when they arise.

Employee benefits
Share-based remuneration
The cost of granting share options to employees is recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income based on the fair value at the date of grant.

The fair value of the net asset value (non-market based) vesting condition is calculated when the options are granted, using the modified binomial option 
pricing model. At the end of each reporting period, the directors review their estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest based on actual 
and forecast net asset values. The impact of any revision to original estimates is recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income, with a 
corresponding adjustment to equity. 

The fair value of the total shareholder return (market based) vesting condition is calculated when the options are granted using the Monte Carlo simulation 
option pricing model, using various assumptions as set out in note 20. The fair value is charged on a straight-line basis over the vesting period. No 
adjustment is made to the original estimate for market based conditions after the date of grant, regardless of whether the options vest or not.

The amount charged in the Statement of Comprehensive Income is credited to the share-based payments reserve. Following the exercise of share options, 
the charges previously recognised in respect of those options are released from the share-based payments reserve to retained earnings. 

Pension contributions
Payments to defined contribution plans are charged as an expense to the Statement of Comprehensive Income as they fall due.

119

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

1 Accounting policies continued

Investment properties
Investment properties are initially recognised on acquisition at cost, including related acquisition costs, and are revalued annually to reflect fair value. Fair 
value is determined either by external professional valuers or by the directors in the case of properties sold shortly after the period end. The fair value, as 
determined by the valuers, is reduced for any unamortised lease incentive balances.

Gains or losses arising on the revaluation of investment properties are included in the Statement of Comprehensive Income. Depreciation is not provided in 
respect of investment properties.

Additions to properties include costs of a capital nature only. Expenditure is classified as capital when it results in future economic benefits which are 
expected to accrue to the Group. All other property expenditure is written-off in the Statement of Comprehensive Income as incurred.

Premiums payable to tenants in connection with the surrender of their lease obligations are capitalised if they arise in connection with a value-enhancing 
project, otherwise they are recognised immediately in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

Amounts received by way of compensation for dilapidations from tenants vacating properties are credited against the cost of reinstatement works. Where 
the Group has no intention of carrying out such works, the amounts received are credited to the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

Purchases and sales of investment properties are recognised in the financial statements when the significant risks and rewards of ownership are 
transferred. 

All of the Group’s leases to its tenants are operating leases except where the Group grants long leasehold interests to tenants, in which case, as substantially 
all the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to the tenant, the property is not recognised as an investment property.

Acquisitions
Where properties are acquired through corporate acquisitions and there are no significant assets (other than investment property) and liabilities, and 
without a business being acquired, the acquisition is treated as an asset acquisition. In all other cases, the acquisition is treated as a business combination.

Joint ventures
Joint ventures are those entities over which the Group has joint control, established by contractual agreement. The Group has one joint venture, the 
investment in which is accounted for using the equity method. On initial recognition the investment was recognised at cost. Subsequently, the carrying 
amount is increased or decreased to recognise the Group’s share of the profit or loss of, and dividends from, the joint venture. The Group’s investment in 
the joint venture is presented separately on the Balance Sheet and the Group’s share of the joint venture’s post-tax profit or loss for the year is also 
presented separately in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

Where there is an indication that the Group’s investment in its joint venture may be impaired, the Group evaluates the recoverable amount of its 
investment, being the higher of the joint venture’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. If the recoverable amount is lower than the carrying value an 
impairment loss is recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

If the Group’s share of losses in the joint venture equals or exceeds its investment in the joint venture, the Group does not recognise further losses, unless 
it has legal or constructive obligations to make payments on behalf of the joint venture.

In the Company’s Balance Sheet, the investment in its joint venture is stated at cost less any provision for impairment loss. 

Trade receivables and payables 
Trade receivables and trade payables are recognised at fair value and subsequently held at amortised cost, less any provision for impairment in respect of 
trade receivables.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and on-demand bank deposits. 

Cash held on deposit which has certain conditions restricting its use and is not available on demand, liquid or readily convertible, is classified within other 
receivables.

Borrowings and costs of raising finance
Borrowings are initially recognised at fair value net of transaction costs incurred and are subsequently held at amortised cost. Issue costs and premiums are 
written-off to the Statement of Comprehensive Income using an effective interest rate method.

Derivative financial instruments
Derivative financial instruments, comprising interest rate swaps for hedging purposes, are measured at fair value. Movements in fair value are recognised in 
the Statement of Comprehensive Income.

Segmental information
The Group’s properties, which are all located in London’s West End, are managed as a single portfolio. Its properties, which are of a similar type, are 
combined into villages. All of the villages are geographically close to each other and have similar economic features and risks. In view of the similar 
characteristics and the reporting of all investment, income and expenditure to the Board at an overall Group level, the aggregation criteria set out in IFRS 8 
have been applied to give one reportable segment.

The Board assesses the performance of the reportable segment based on net property income and investment property valuation. Financial information 
provided to the Board is prepared on a basis consistent with these financial statements.

120

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

2 Revenue 

Rents receivable

Recoverable property expenses

2017
£M

103.4

8.1

111.5

Rents receivable includes a charge of £0.5 million from amortisation of accrued income in respect of lease incentives (2016: credit of £0.5 million).

3 Property charges

Property operating costs

Fees payable to managing agents

Letting, rent review, and lease renewal costs

Village promotion costs

Property outgoings

Recoverable property expenses

4 Operating profit

The following items have been (credited)/charged in arriving at operating profit:

Administrative fees receivable from joint venture

Depreciation

AUDITOR REMUNERATION

Audit of the Company

Audit of the Group

Total fees for audit services

Audit related assurance services - half year review

Other assurance services

Non-audit services

Total fees for non-audit services

Total fees 

2016
£M

98.4

7.8

106.2

2016
£M

6.5

2.3

3.3

2.2

14.3

7.8

22.1

2016
£M

(0.2)

0.4

2016
£000

59

83

142

21

25

25

71

2017
£M

7.1

2.4

3.4

2.2

15.1

8.1

23.2

2017
£M

(0.1)

0.3

2017
£000

60

128

188

22

27

29

78

266

213

The auditor provided no taxation services to the Group in 2017 (2016: nil). Total fees for non-audit services represented 41% (2016: 50%) of the total fees 
for audit services. The audit fees for the Company and the Group are relatively low due primarily to the simple Group corporate structure.

121

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

4 Operating profit continued

Group and Company

EMPLOYEE COSTS 

Wages and salaries

Annual bonuses (including social security costs)

Social security costs

Other pension costs

Equity-settled remuneration (note 5)

AVERAGE MONTHLY NUMBER OF EMPLOYEES

Executive directors

Head office and property management

Estate management

2017
£M

4.5

2.7

0.6

0.3

1.8

9.9

2016 
£M

4.3

3.0

0.5

0.4

2.5

10.7

2017
NUMBER

2016 
NUMBER

4  

22

1

27

4

20

1

25

A summary of directors’ emoluments, including the disclosures required by the Companies Act 2006, is set out in the Annual Remuneration Report on 
pages 92 to 100.

5 Equity-settled remuneration

Charge for share-based remuneration

Employer’s national insurance in respect of share awards

A summary of the principal assumptions made at the last grant date is set out in note 20.

6 Profit on disposal of investment properties

Net sale proceeds

Book value at date of sale

7 Finance costs

Debenture stock interest and amortisation

Mortgage bond interest

Bank and other interest

Issue cost amortisation

8 Tax charge for the year

2017
£M

1.4

0.4

1.8

2017
£M

13.4

(12.3)

1.1

2017
£M

0.1

7.4

23.8

1.5

32.8

2016
£M

1.9

0.6

2.5

2016
£M

-

-

-

2016
£M

5.0

-

27.7

1.0

33.7

The Group’s wholly-owned business is subject to taxation as a REIT. Under the REIT regime, income from its rental business (calculated by reference to tax 
rather than accounting rules) and chargeable gains from the sale of its investment properties are exempt from corporation tax. 

122

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

9 Investment properties

At 1 October

Acquisitions 

Disposals

Refurbishment and other capital expenditure

Net surplus on revaluation of investment properties

Book value at 30 September

Fair value at 30 September:

Core properties valued by Cushman & Wakefield

Non-core properties valued by Cushman & Wakefield

Less: unamortised lease incentives (note 10)

Book value at 30 September

The investment properties valuation comprises: 

Freehold properties

Leasehold properties

2017
£M

2016
£M

3,111.6

2,908.0

37.1

(12.3)

40.3

230.6

62.7

-

32.6

108.3

3,407.3

3,111.6

3,416.5

3,123.6

2.4

(11.6)

-

(12.0)

3,407.3

3,111.6

2017
£M

3,133.0

285.9

3,418.9

2016
£M

2,864.8

258.8

3,123.6

Investment properties were valued at 30 September 2017 by qualified professional valuers, being members of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors 
(RICS), working for Cushman & Wakefield, Chartered Surveyors, acting in the capacity of external valuers. 

All properties were valued on the basis of fair value and highest and best use, in accordance with the RICS Valuation - Global Standards, which incorporate, 
the International Valuation Standards and the RICS UK Valuation Standards edition current at the valuation date and IFRS 13. When considering a property’s 
highest and best use, the valuer considers its actual and potential uses which are physically, legally and financially viable. Where the highest and best use 
differs from the existing use, the valuer considers the use a market participant would have in mind when formulating the price it would bid and reflects the 
cost and likelihood of achieving that use.

The fair value of the Group’s investment properties has primarily been determined using a market approach, which provides an indication of value by 
comparing the subject asset with similar assets for which price information is available. The external valuer uses information provided by the Group, such as 
tenancy information and capital expenditure expectations. In deriving fair value, the valuer also makes a series of assumptions, using professional judgement 
and market observations. These assumptions include equivalent yields and rental values (ERVs) applicable to the properties. Equivalent yields are based on 
current market prices, depending on, inter alia, the location and use of the properties. ERVs are calculated using a number of factors which include current 
rental income, market comparatives and occupancy levels. Whilst there is market evidence for these inputs, and recent transaction prices for similar 
properties, there is still a significant element of estimation and judgement. As a result of adjustments made to market observable data, these significant 
inputs are deemed unobservable.

Since the key inputs to the valuation are unobservable, the Group considers all its investment properties fall within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy in IFRS 
13. The Group’s policy is to recognise transfers between hierarchy levels as at the date of the event or change in circumstances that caused the transfer. 
There have been no transfers during the year (2016: none).

The key assumptions made by the valuers are set out in the Basis of Valuation on pages 142 to 143. 

The major inputs to the external valuation are reviewed by the senior management team. In addition, the valuer meets with external auditors and the Audit 
Committee. Further details of the Audit Committee’s responsibilities in relation to valuations can be found in the Audit Committee Report on pages 82 to 
84.

A summary of the Cushman & Wakefield report can be found on pages 144 to 145.

Fees were agreed at fixed amounts in advance of the valuations being carried out. It is noted that Cushman & Wakefield acted as letting agents for 
Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC, Shaftesbury Soho Limited and Shaftesbury Chinatown PLC in the year. The fees payable by the Group to Cushman & Wakefield do 
not constitute a significant part of their fee income. 

123

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

9 Investment properties continued

Sensitivity analysis
As noted in the critical judgements, assumptions and estimates section on page 118, the valuation of the Group’s property portfolio is inherently subjective. 
As a result, the valuations the Group places on its property portfolio are subject to a degree of uncertainty and are made on the basis of assumptions which 
may not prove to be accurate, particularly in periods of volatility or low transaction flow in the commercial property market.

The Group’s properties are all located in London’s West End and are virtually all multi-use buildings, usually configured with commercial uses on the lower 
floors and office and/or residential uses on the upper floors. Cushman & Wakefield value properties in their entirety and not by use, consequently the 
sensitivity analysis below has been performed on the Group’s portfolio as a whole. 

Increase/(decrease) in the fair value of investment properties

CHANGE IN ERV

CHANGE IN 
EQUIVALENT YIELDS

+5.0% 
£M

153.7

-5.0%
£M

+0.25%
£M

(154.4)

(241.9)

-0.25%
£M

275.8

These key unobservable inputs are inter-dependent. All other factors being equal, a higher equivalent yield would lead to a decrease in the valuation of a 
property, and an increase in the ERV would increase the capital value, and vice versa. 

At 30 September 2017, the Group had capital commitments of £13.6 million (2016: £31.3 million). See pages 48 to 49 for a discussion of the Group’s property 
activity during the year.

10 Accrued income

Accrued income in respect of lease incentives 

Less: included in trade and other receivables (note 13)

2017
£M

11.6

(2.1)

9.5

2016
£M

12.0

(2.2)

9.8

Lease incentives are allocated between amounts to be charged against rental income within one year of the Balance Sheet date and amounts which will be 
charged against rental income in subsequent years.

11 Investment in joint venture

Group

At 1 October

Share of profits 

Dividends received

Book value at 30 September

Company

Shares at cost

At 1 October and 30 September

2017
£M

146.4

6.4

(4.8)

148.0

2017
£M

2016
£M

129.6

18.5

(1.7)

146.4

2016
£M

59.0

59.0

The Company owns 7,782,100 B ordinary £1 shares in Longmartin Properties Limited, representing 50% of that company’s issued share capital. The company 
is incorporated in Great Britain and registered in England and Wales and is engaged in property investment in London.

Longmartin Properties Limited’s principal place of business and registered office is the same as the Group, as set out on page 103.

Control of Longmartin Properties Limited is shared equally with The Mercers’ Company, which owns 50% of its issued share capital.

124

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

11 Investment in joint venture continued

The summarised Statement of Comprehensive Income and Balance Sheet used for consolidation purposes are presented below:

Statement of Comprehensive Income

Rents receivable

Recoverable property expenses

Revenue from properties

Property outgoings

Recoverable property expenses

Property charges

Net property income

Administrative expenses

Operating profit before investment property valuation movements

Net surplus on revaluation of investment properties

Operating profit

Net finance costs

Profit before tax

Current tax

Deferred tax

Tax (charge)/credit for the year 

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year

Profit attributable to the Group

Balance Sheet

Non-current assets

Investment properties at book value

Accrued income 

Other receivables

Cash and cash equivalents

Current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Secured term loan

Other non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets 

Net assets attributable to the Group

2017
£M

17.7

1.5

19.2

(1.7)

(1.5)

(3.2)

16.0

(0.2)

15.8

5.3

21.1

(6.8)

14.3

(1.7)

0.2

(1.5)

12.8

6.4

2017
£M

2016
£M

15.1

1.4

16.5

(1.6)

(1.4)

(3.0)

13.5

(0.4)

13.1

22.5

35.6

(6.6)

29.0

(1.2)

9.1

7.9

36.9

18.5

2016
£M

462.6

455.0

3.1

1.3

4.0

1.3

467.0

460.3

1.2

3.9

4.1

4.0

472.1

468.4

10.1

9.4

120.0

46.1

176.2

295.9

120.0

46.3

175.7

292.7

148.0

146.4

125

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

12 Investment in subsidiaries

Shares in Group undertakings

At 1 October

Acquisition of subsidiary

Impairment of subsidiary

At 30 September

2017
£M

754.7

9.8

(144.9)

619.6

2016
£M

997.9

1.7

(244.9)

754.7

During the year the Company acquired 100% of the share capital of Shaftesbury West End Limited (formerly Soho Thai Limited). Shaftesbury Chinatown PLC 
distributed £144.9 million to the Company, following a capital reduction during the year. Following this, the Company impaired its investment in this subsidiary. In 
2016, Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC distributed £244.9 million to the Company following a capital reduction. The Company then impaired its investment. The 
distributions were settled through intercompany indebtedness.

The full list of the Company’s subsidiary undertakings is presented below. Except where indicated otherwise, the Company owns, directly, all of the ordinary 
issued share capital:

Active subsidiaries:
Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC
Shaftesbury Covent Garden Limited
Shaftesbury Chinatown PLC (formerly Shaftesbury Chinatown Limited)
Shaftesbury Soho Limited
Shaftesbury AV Investment Limited

Shaftesbury AV Limited*
Shaftesbury CL Investment Limited
Shaftesbury CL Limited*
Helcon Limited
Shaftesbury West End Limited (formerly Soho Thai Limited)

Dormant subsidiaries:
Carnaby Estate Holdings Limited
Carnaby Investments Limited
Carnaby Property Investments Limited*
Chinatown Estate Holdings Limited
Chinatown Property Investments Limited*
Covent Garden Estate Holdings Limited
Shaftesbury Covent Garden Property Investments Limited*
Shaftesbury Charlotte Street Limited
Charlotte Street Estate Holdings Limited
Chinatown London Limited

Shaftesbury Investments 1 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 2 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 4 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 5 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 6 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 7 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 8 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 9 Limited
Shaftesbury Investments 10 Limited

* 100% of the share capital of these subsidiaries is held by other Group companies.

All of the companies are either engaged in property investment or dormant. They are incorporated in Great Britain and are registered in England and Wales.  
The registered office of the subsidiaries is the same as the Group, as set out on page 103.

13 Trade and other receivables

Amounts due from tenants

Provision for doubtful debts 

Accrued income in respect of lease incentives (note 10)

Amounts due from subsidiaries

Amounts due from joint venture

Prepayments

Other receivables

GROUP

2017
£M

12.0

(0.5)

11.5

2.1

-

0.9

7.1

0.4

2016
£M

10.5

(0.5)

10.0

2.2

-

0.9

4.4

1.8

COMPANY

AS RESTATED
2016
£M

2017
£M

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

482.7

769.1

0.9

0.6

0.1

0.9

0.6

-

22.0

19.3

484.3

770.6

Amounts due from tenants at each year end included amounts contractually due and invoiced on 29 September in respect of rents and service charge 
contributions in advance for the period 29 September to 24 December. As at 30 September 2017, amounts due from tenants which were more than 90 days 
overdue totalled £1.1 million (2016: £1.5 million) and are considered to be past due. Provisions against these overdue amounts totalled £0.4 million (2016: £0.4 
million). The remaining balance is not considered to be impaired.

At 30 September 2017, cash deposits totalling £18.5 million (2016: £18.0 million) were held against tenants’ rent payment obligations. The deposits are held in 
bank accounts administered by the Group’s managing agents. 

Amounts due from subsidiaries at 30 September 2016 have been restated and presented on a gross basis (see note 15). This has no impact on the net assets 
of the Company for that year.

126

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

14 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at 30 September 2017, comprising cash at bank, were £45.6 million (2016: £15.6 million) for the Group and £25.8 million (2016: 
£0.5 million) for the Company.

Non-current other receivables include £3.7 million at 30 September 2017 (2016: £3.7 million) which relate to cash held on deposit as security for certain 
secured term loans, and where there are certain conditions restricting their use. 

15 Trade and other payables

Rents and service charges invoiced in advance

Amounts due in respect of property acquisitions

Trade payables and accruals in respect of capital expenditure

Amounts due to subsidiaries

Other taxation and social security

Other payables and accruals

GROUP

2017
£M

22.8

-

4.0

-

5.2

9.6

41.6

2016
£M

21.3

0.7

5.2

-

6.1

12.0

45.3

COMPANY

AS RESTATED
2016
£M

2017
£M

-

-

-

100.6

2.0

4.0

106.6

-

-

-

13.5

3.4

5.8

22.7

Amounts due to subsidiaries at 30 September 2016 have been restated and presented on a gross basis (see note 13). This has no impact on the net assets of 
the Company for that year.

16 Borrowings

Group – Current borrowings

Debenture Stock 

Group – Non-current borrowings

Mortgage bonds

Secured bank facilities

Secured term loans

Total non-current borrowings

Total Group borrowings

Company – Current borrowings

Debenture Stock

Company – Non-current borrowings

Secured bank facilities

Total non-current borrowings

Total Company borrowings

2017

2016

NOMINAL
VALUE
£M

UNAMORTISED
ISSUE COSTS
£M

BOOK
VALUE
£M

NOMINAL
VALUE
£M

UNAMORTISED
ISSUE COSTS
£M

-

-

-

92.2

BOOK
VALUE
£M

92.2

-

289.0

380.1

669.1

761.3

-

-

(1.7)

(4.7)

(6.4)

(6.4)

575.0

-

384.8

959.8

959.8

-

-

-

-

(5.8)

(0.8)

(4.4)

(11.0)

(11.0)

569.2

(0.8)

380.4

948.8

948.8

-

290.7

384.8

675.5

767.7

-

-

92.2

-

92.2

(0.8)

(0.8)

(0.8)

(0.8)

(0.8)

(0.8)

290.7

290.7

382.9

(1.7)

(1.7)

(1.7)

289.0

289.0

381.2

At 30 September 2017, there were no drawings against the Company’s secured bank facilities (2016: £290.7 million). The Company is still able to benefit from 
these committed revolving credit facilities, and as such, unamortised issue costs of £0.8 million continue to be carried in the Balance Sheet.

127

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

16 Borrowings continued

Net debt/funds

Nominal borrowings – gross

Cash and cash equivalents (note 14)

GROUP

COMPANY

2017
£M

959.8

(45.6)

914.2

2016
£M

767.7

(15.6)

752.1

2017
£M

-

(25.8)

(25.8)

2016
£M

382.9

(0.5)

382.4

On 7 October 2016, Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC, a subsidiary of the Company, issued £285 million of Guaranteed First Mortgage Bonds (mortgage bonds 2031) 
with a coupon of 2.487% and maturity in September 2031. The bonds are secured by fixed charges over the properties held by Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC 
and a floating charge over Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC’s assets. They also benefit from an unsecured guarantee from the Company. 

On the same day, the Company’s existing £61.0 million Debenture Stock (the stock) was redeemed in full, being satisfied by existing holders of the stock 
exchanging their stock for new bonds, or taking cash. Of the £285 million proceeds raised by the issue of the new bonds, £92.2 million was used to redeem 
the existing stock. This was satisfied by £10.4 million of cash and £81.8 million of new bonds. The fixed and floating charges relating to the stock were 
released.

On 7 September 2017, Shaftesbury Chinatown PLC, a subsidiary of the Company, issued £290 million of Guaranteed First Mortgage Bonds (mortgage bonds 
2027) with a coupon of 2.348% and maturity in September 2027. The bonds are secured by fixed charges over the properties held by Shaftesbury 
Chinatown PLC and a floating charge over Shaftesbury Chinatown PLC’s assets. They also benefit from an unsecured guarantee from the Company. 

The Group’s borrowings are secured by fixed charges over certain investment properties held by subsidiaries, with a carrying value of £3,015.4 million (2016: 
£2,436.9 million), and by floating charges over the assets of the Company and/or certain subsidiaries.

Availability and maturity of borrowings (Group)

Repayable within 1 year

Repayable between 2 and 5 years

Repayable between 5 and 10 years

Repayable after 10 years

2017 FACILITIES

2016 FACILITIES

COMMITTED
£M

DRAWN
£M

UNDRAWN
£M

COMMITTED
£M

DRAWN
£M

UNDRAWN
£M

-

275.0

290.0

669.8

1,234.8

-

-

290.0

669.8

959.8

-

275.0

-

-

275.0

92.2

350.0

-

384.8

827.0

92.2

290.7

-

384.8

767.7

-

59.3

-

-

59.3

Availability and maturity of borrowings (Company)

Repayable within 1 year

Repayable between 2 and 5 years

2017 FACILITIES

2016 FACILITIES

COMMITTED
£M

DRAWN
£M

UNDRAWN
£M

COMMITTED
£M

DRAWN
£M

UNDRAWN
£M

-

275.0

275.0

-

-

-

-

275.0

275.0

92.2

350.0

442.2

92.2

290.7

382.9

-

59.3

59.3

128

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

16 Borrowings continued

Interest rate profile of interest bearing borrowings (Group)

Floating rate borrowings

LIBOR-linked facilities (including margin)

Hedged borrowings

Interest rate swaps (including margin)

Total bank borrowings

Fixed rate borrowings

Secured term loans 

Mortgage bonds 2027

Mortgage bonds 2031

8.5% First Mortgage Debenture Stock - book value

Weighted average cost of drawn borrowings

Interest rate profile of interest bearing borrowings (Company)

Floating rate borrowings

LIBOR-linked facilities (including margin)

Hedged borrowings

Interest rate swaps (including margin)

Total bank borrowings

Fixed rate borrowings

8.5% First Mortgage Debenture Stock - book value

Weighted average cost of drawn borrowings

2017

2016

DEBT
£M

INTEREST
RATE 

DEBT
£M

INTEREST
RATE 

-

-

-

384.8

290.0

285.0

-

-

-

-

3.85%

2.35%

2.49%

-

2.99%

110.7

1.75%

180.0

290.7

6.17%

4.49%

384.8

3.85%

-

-

92.2

-

-

7.93%

4.45%

2017

2016

DEBT
£M

INTEREST
RATE 

DEBT
£M

INTEREST
RATE 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

110.7

1.75%

180.0

290.7

92.2

6.17%

4.49%

7.93%

5.10%

The Group and Company also incur non-utilisation fees on undrawn facilities. At 30 September 2017, the weighted average charge on the undrawn facilities 
of £275.0 million (2016: £59.3 million) for the Group and Company was 0.69% (2016: 0.70%).

The weighted average credit margin on the Group and Company’s current bank facilities was:

Drawn facilities

If facilities were fully drawn

Details of the Group’s current financial position are discussed on pages 56 to 57.

17 Financial instruments

FAIR VALUE OF DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (GROUP AND COMPANY)

Interest rate swaps

At 1 October – deficit

Swap contracts terminated

Fair value movement credited/(charged) to the Statement of Comprehensive Income

At 30 September – deficit

During the year the Group and Company terminated interest rate swap contracts with a notional principal of £180.0 million at a cost of £92.1 million. 

2017

-

1.51%

2016

1.33%

1.37%

2017
£M

2016
£M

(114.1)

92.1

22.0

-

(79.2)

-

(34.9)

(114.1)

129

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

17 Financial instruments continued

CATEGORIES OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Group

Interest rate swaps

Financial assets: receivables and cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables (note 13)

Amounts due from joint venture (note 13)

Other receivables (note 14)

Cash and cash equivalents (note 14)

Financial liabilities at amortised cost

Trade and other payables - due within one year (note 15)

Interest bearing borrowings (note 16) 

Net financial instruments

Company

Interest rate swaps

Financial assets: loans and receivables

Amounts due from subsidiaries (note 13)

Amounts due from joint venture (note 13)

Financial liabilities at amortised cost

Trade and other payables - due within one year (note 15)

Amounts due to subsidiaries (note 15)

Interest bearing borrowings (note 16) 

Net financial instruments

2017
BOOK
VALUE
£M

AS RESTATED
2016 
BOOK
VALUE
£M

-

(114.1)

11.5

0.9

3.7

45.6

61.7

(13.6)

(948.8)

(962.4)

(900.7)

10.0

0.9

3.7

15.6

30.2

(17.9)

(761.3)

(779.2)

(863.1)

-

(114.1)

482.7

0.9

483.6

(4.0)

(100.6)

0.8

(103.8)

379.8

769.1

0.9

770.0

(5.8)

(13.5)

(381.2)

(400.5)

255.4

Other receivables relate to cash held on deposit, which have certain conditions restricting their use which are due between 2029 and 2035. The Group’s 
trade and other payables are all due within one year (2016: all due within one year). 

Amounts due from/to subsidiaries have been restated at 30 September 2016 to present these balances on a gross basis. This has no impact on the net 
assets of the Company for that year.

Other financial instruments
The Group’s mortgage bonds and secured term loans are held at amortised cost in the Balance Sheet. The fair value of these financial instruments is in 
excess of book value. This excess, which is not recognised in the reported results for the year, is £16.2 million (2016: £52.5 million). The fair values have been 
calculated based on a discounted cash flow model using the relevant reference gilt and appropriate market spread. The valuation technique falls within 
Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy in IFRS 13.

The fair values of the Group’s and Company’s cash and cash equivalents, and those financial instruments included within trade and other receivables, 
interest bearing borrowings (excluding the mortgage bonds and the secured term loans), and trade and other payables are not materially different from the 
values at which they are carried in the financial statements. 

130

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

17 Financial instruments continued

Contractual cash flows
The tables below summarise the undiscounted contractual cash flows arising on interest bearing financial liabilities based on conditions existing at the 
Balance Sheet date. The Group has no obligation to repay its mortgage bonds or secured term loans in advance of their maturities between 2027 and 2035.

30 SEPTEMBER 2017

Group 
Financial liabilities

Interest bearing borrowings:

Principal (note 16)

Interest

Total

30 SEPTEMBER 2016

Group 
Financial instruments

Interest rate swaps

Financial liabilities

Interest bearing borrowings:

Principal (note 16)

Interest

Total

30 SEPTEMBER 2017

Company 
Financial liabilities

Interest bearing borrowings:

Principal (note 16)

Interest

Total

30 SEPTEMBER 2016

Company 
Financial instruments

Interest rate swaps

Financial liabilities

Interest bearing borrowings:

Principal (note 16)

Interest

Total

BOOK
VALUE
£M

CONTRACTUAL
CASH FLOWS
£M

<1 
YEAR
£M

1-2
YEARS
£M

2-5
YEARS
£M

5-10
YEARS
£M

>10 
YEARS
£M

948.8

3.6

959.8

371.6

952.4

1,331.4

BOOK
VALUE
£M

CONTRACTUAL
CASH FLOWS
£M

-

28.7

28.7

<1 
YEAR
£M

-

28.7

28.7

1-2
YEARS
£M

-

86.2

86.2

2-5
YEARS
£M

290.0

143.6

433.6

5-10
YEARS
£M

669.8

84.4

754.2

>10 
YEARS
£M

114.1

123.8

6.9

8.3

24.0

35.0

49.6

761.3

5.1

880.5

767.7

235.6

1,127.1

BOOK
VALUE
£M

CONTRACTUAL
CASH FLOWS
£M

(0.8)

0.2

(0.6)

-

-

-

BOOK
VALUE
£M

CONTRACTUAL
CASH FLOWS
£M

92.2

20.0

119.1

<1 
YEAR
£M

-

-

-

<1 
YEAR
£M

-

19.9

28.2

1-2
YEARS
£M

-

-

-

290.7

50.7

365.4

2-5
YEARS
£M

-

-

-

-

74.1

109.1

5-10
YEARS
£M

-

-

-

384.8

70.9

505.3

>10 
YEARS
£M

-

-

-

1-2
YEARS
£M

2-5
YEARS
£M

5-10
YEARS
£M

>10 
YEARS
£M

114.1

123.8

6.9

8.3

24.0

35.0

49.6

381.2

2.2

497.5

382.9

16.6

523.3

92.2

5.2

104.3

-

5.1

13.4

290.7

6.3

321.0

-

-

-

-

35.0

49.6

131

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

17 Financial instruments continued

Management of financial risks (Group and Company)
Credit risk
Credit risk refers to the risk that a counterparty will default on their contractual obligations resulting in financial loss to the Group.

The Group reviews the creditworthiness of potential tenants prior to entering into contractual arrangements. Where appropriate, tenants are required to 
provide cash deposits to mitigate the potential loss in the event of default. Deposits held are referred to in note 13. The Group has a large and diverse 
tenant base so that tenant credit risk is widely spread.

Provision is made in full where recovery of financial assets is, in the opinion of the directors, uncertain. The carrying amount of financial assets, net of 
provisions for impairment, represents the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk. Financial assets that are neither past due nor impaired are expected to 
be fully recoverable.

Where cash deposits are held, they are placed with one of the Group’s existing facility providers.

Liquidity risk
The Board keeps under review the Group’s funding requirements, available facilities and covenant compliance to ensure it has sufficient funds available to 
meet its existing commitments and to extend its portfolio through investment and acquisition of additional properties. The Group’s policies regarding 
finance and its current financial position are set out in the Strategic Report on pages 56 to 57. 

Market risk
Market risk arises from the Group’s use of interest bearing financial instruments, and is the risk that future cash flows from financial instruments will 
fluctuate due to changes in interest rates and credit costs. The Group’s policy is to minimise market risk through long-term fixed rate debt. The Board keeps 
under review the Group’s market risk, particularly in light of expectations of future interest rate movements. 

Interest rate risk
At 30 September 2017, the Group’s drawn borrowings consisted entirely of fixed rate debt. Given this, the Group’s exposure to changes in long-term interest 
rates and the potential impact on the Group’s results and equity is considered to be insignificant. This does not take into account valuation movements on 
the Group’s investment properties as a result of movements in long-term interest rates, which would be reflected in the Statement of Comprehensive 
Income.

Capital risk management
The capital structure of the Group consists of equity and net borrowings, including cash held on deposit. The type and maturity of the Group’s borrowings is 
set out in note 16 and the Group’s equity structure is set out in the Statement of Changes in Equity. The Group regularly reviews its loan covenant 
compliance.

The Group’s capital management objectives are to continue as a going concern and to provide enhanced shareholder returns whilst maintaining an 
appropriate risk reward balance to accommodate changing financial and operating market cycles. The Group’s capital structure such as levels of gearing and 
loan-to-value ratio are discussed in the Strategic Report on pages 56 to 57.

18 Share capital

Allotted and fully paid (ordinary 25p shares)

At 1 October 

Exercise of share options

At 30 September 

2017
NUMBER
MILLION

2016
NUMBER
MILLION

278.6

0.4

279.0

278.2

0.4

278.6

2017
£M

69.7

0.1

69.8

2016
£M

69.6

0.1

69.7

The Company’s Articles of Association contain provisions which set out the circumstances in which shareholders can exercise control over the issue of 
shares.

19 Reserves

The Statement of Changes in Equity is set out on page 117.

The following describes the nature and purpose of each of the reserves within equity.

RESERVE

Share premium

DESCRIPTION AND PURPOSE

Share premium is the amount by which the fair value of the consideration received for ordinary shares exceeds 
the nominal value of shares issued, net of expenses.

Share-based payments reserve

The equity-settled remuneration expense charged to the Statement of Comprehensive Income is credited to 
the share-based payments reserve. Upon exercise of options, the expense previously recognised is transferred 
to retained earnings.

Retained earnings

Cumulative gains and losses recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income. Transfers from the  
share-based payments reserve are also credited to this account.

The Company’s retained earnings at 30 September 2017 include amounts distributable of £218.0 million (2016 as restated: £316.5 million). The prior year 
figure has been restated to reflect realised losses on cancelled interest rate swap contracts prior to 30 September 2016.

132

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

20 Share-based remuneration

The following options to subscribe for ordinary shares granted to executive directors and employees under the Company’s share option schemes were 
outstanding at 30 September 2017:

AWARDED

EXERCISED

LAPSED

AT
30.9.2017

EXERCISABLE
30.9.2017

OPTION
EXERCISE
PRICE

EXERCISE
PERIOD

DATE OF GRANT

Sharesave scheme

5.7.2012

2.7.2014

3.7.2015

1.7.2016

30.6.2017

LTIP

20.12.2013

8.12.2014*

2.12.2015

8.2.2016

12.12.2016

AT
1.10.2016

11,277

37,633

19,270

21,368

(11,277)

(14,214)

-

-

(756)

(540)

-

-

-

-

-

23,419

17,974

21,368

16,115

-

402,426

138,800

-

-

-

(1,524)

(3,150)

-

224,225

(5,179)

406,621

-

16,115

451,000

403,950

141,950

224,225

-

-

-

-

-

411,800

-

-

(451,000)

-

-

-

-

£3.99

£5.38

2017

2019

£6.94

2018-2020

£7.41

2019-2021

£7.74

2020-2022

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

2016-2017

2017-2018

2018-2019

2020-2021

2019-2022

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1,310,673

427,915

(477,247)

(10,393)

1,250,948

* 402,426 options over ordinary shares will vest in December 2017, following satisfaction of performance targets in respect of the three years ended 30 September 2017.

Weighted average exercise price

£0.41

£0.29

£0.27

£0.36

£0.43

AT
1.10.2016

AWARDED

EXERCISED

LAPSED

AT
30.9.2017

Weighted average remaining contractual life

1.2 years

For share options exercised during the year the weighted average share price at the date of exercise was:

SCHEME

LTIP

Sharesave 

DATE OF 
GRANT

DATE OF  
EXERCISE

NUMBER OF 
SHARES

20.12.2013

14.12.2016

451,000

5.7.2012

2.7.2014

1.8.2017

1.8.2017

3.7.2015 

12.4.2017

11,277

14,214

756

2.1 years

WEIGHTED 
AVERAGE  
PRICE AT 
EXERCISE

£8.91

£9.81

£9.81

£9.59

The LTIP and Sharesave schemes were the only share-based payment arrangements that existed during the year. 

A summary of the rules of the schemes referred to above is set out in the Remuneration Report on page 91. The remuneration policy, which includes more 
detail, is available on the Group’s website.

133

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

20 Share-based remuneration continued

The fair value of option grants is measured by Lane Clark & Peacock LLP, Actuaries & Consultants. For the grant made during the year, the main inputs and 
assumptions, and the resulting fair values, are as follows:

2016 LTIP

12.12.16

£9.01

Nil

3

NAV and TSR

18%

0.3%

19%

84%

Modified binomial
Monte Carlo

Grant date

Share price at date of grant

Exercise price

Expected life – years

Performance condition

Assumed return volatility per annum - TSR performance condition

Risk free discount rate per annum - TSR performance condition

Assumed index return volatility* - TSR performance condition

Assumed correlation between the Company’s shares and those in the index* - TSR performance condition

Basis of option pricing:

NAV performance condition

TSR performance condition

Discount for marketability

Fair values:
NAV
TSR

* The index is the FTSE 350 REIT Index.

NO  
HOLDING PERIOD

CONTINGENT  
HOLDING PERIOD

TWO YEAR  
HOLDING PERIOD

0%

£9.01
£3.56

3%

£8.74
£3.45

6%

£8.47
£3.35

The assumed volatility was determined taking into account factors including the historical volatility of the Company share price. Actual future volatility may 
differ, potentially significantly, from historic volatility. 

The vesting conditions relating to options granted under the 2016 LTIP are described in the Annual Remuneration Report on page 95.

21 Dividends

Final dividend for:

Year ended 30 September 2016 at 7.55p per share

Year ended 30 September 2015 at 6.925p per share

Interim dividend for:

Year ended 30 September 2017 at 7.9p per share

Year ended 30 September 2016 at 7.15p per share

Dividends for the year

Timing difference on payment of withholding tax

Dividends cash paid

2017
£M

21.3

-

22.0

-

43.3

1.2

44.5

2016
£M

-

19.5

-

19.9

39.4

(1.2)

38.2

A final dividend of 8.1p per share was recommended by the Board on 27 November 2017. Subject to approval by shareholders at the 2018 AGM, the final 
dividend will be paid as an ordinary dividend on 16 February 2018 to shareholders on the register at 19 January 2018. The dividend totalling £22.6 million will 
be accounted for as an appropriation of revenue reserves in the year ending 30 September 2018. See page 53 of the Strategic Report for commentary on 
dividends.

The trustee of the Company’s Employee Benefit Trust waived dividends in respect of 597,351 (2016: 491,804) ordinary shares during the year.

134

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

22 Cash flows from operating activities

GROUP

COMPANY

OPERATING ACTIVITIES

Profit before tax

Adjusted for:

Lease incentives recognised (note 2)

Charge for share-based remuneration (note 5)

Depreciation (note 4)

Investment property valuation movements (note 9)

Profit on disposal of investment properties (note 6)

Net finance costs

Administrative charges, finance charges, and dividends received from subsidiaries settled 
through intercompany indebtedness

Impairment of subsidiary (note 12)

Dividends received from joint venture

Share of profit from joint venture (note 11)

Cash flows from operations before changes in working capital

Changes in working capital:

Change in trade and other receivables

Change in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operating activities

23 Movement in borrowings 

Group

Mortgage bonds

8.5% First Mortgage Debenture Stock 2024

Secured bank facilities

Secured term loans

Issue costs

Year ended 30 September 2016

Company

8.5% First Mortgage Debenture Stock 2024

Secured bank facilities

Issue costs

Year ended 30 September 2016

2017
£M

301.6

AS RESTATED
2016
£M

99.1

0.5

1.4

0.3

(0.5)

1.9

0.4

(230.6)

(108.3)

(1.1)

10.7

-

-

-

(6.4)

76.4

(0.5)

0.8

76.7

-

97.7

-

-

-

(18.5)

71.8

(0.2)

3.0

74.6

2017
£M

57.7

-

1.4

0.3

-

-

2016
£M

282.9

-

1.9

0.4

-

-

(12.0)

(200.1)

82.6

(623.1)

144.9

244.9

(4.8)

-

(12.6)

(0.1)

(1.1)

(13.8)

(1.7)

-

(12.1)

0.1

1.0

(11.0)

1.10.2016
£M

CASH
FLOWS
£M

NON-CASH
ITEMS
£M

30.9.2017
£M

-

(493.2)

(92.2)

(290.7)

(384.8)

6.4

(761.3)

(640.3)

(92.2)

(290.7)

1.7

(381.2)

(267.9)

10.4

290.7

-

6.1

(186.0)

(91.0)

10.4

290.7

-

301.1

(83.7)

(81.8)

81.8

-

-

(1.5)

(1.5)

(30.0)

81.8

-

(0.9)

80.9

(29.6)

(575.0)

-

-

(384.8)

11.0

(948.8)

(761.3)

-

-

0.8

0.8

(381.2)

135

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

24 Performance measures

Earnings per share

Basic

Dilutive effect of share options

Diluted

2017

2016

PROFIT
AFTER
TAX 
£M

301.6

-

301.6

NUMBER OF
SHARES
MILLION

EARNINGS
PER SHARE
PENCE 

278.9

0.7

279.6

108.1

(0.2)

107.9

PROFIT
AFTER
TAX 
£M

99.1

-

99.1

NUMBER OF
SHARES
MILLION

EARNINGS
PER SHARE
PENCE

278.4

1.0

279.4

35.6

(0.1)

35.5

EPRA earnings per share
The calculations below are in accordance with the EPRA Best Practice Recommendations.

2017

2016

NUMBER OF
SHARES
MILLION

EARNINGS
PER SHARE
PENCE 

PROFIT
AFTER
TAX 
£M

NUMBER OF
SHARES
MILLION

EARNINGS
PER SHARE
PENCE

278.9

108.1

99.1

278.4

35.6

Basic

EPRA adjustments:

  Investment property valuation surplus (note 9)

   Profit on disposal of investment properties (note 6)

  Movement in fair value of derivatives (note 17)

  Recognition of fair value of Debenture Stock

Adjustments in respect of the joint venture:

  Investment property valuation surplus 

  Deferred tax 

EPRA earnings

PROFIT
AFTER
TAX 
£M

301.6

(230.6)

(1.1)

(22.0)

-

(2.6)

(0.1)

45.2

278.9

Net asset value per share
The calculations below are in accordance with the EPRA Best Practice Recommendations.

Basic

Dilutive effect of share options

Diluted

Fair value of derivatives

Deferred tax*

EPRA NAV

Fair value of derivatives

Deferred tax*

Excess of fair value over carrying value of debt:

   Secured term loans*

   Mortgage bonds

EPRA NNNAV

2017

NUMBER
OF ORDINARY
SHARES
MILLION

279.0

0.8

279.8

NET
ASSETS
£M

2,646.9

0.5

2,647.4

-

17.9

2,665.3

279.8

-

(17.9)

(40.0)

15.5

2,622.9

279.8

* Includes our 50% share of deferred tax and fair value of secured term loans in the Longmartin joint venture.

136

(82.7)

(108.3)

(0.4)

(7.9)

-

(0.9)

-

16.2

NET ASSET
VALUE PER
SHARE
£ 

9.49

9.46

-

0.06

9.52

-

(0.06)

(0.14)

0.05

9.37

-

34.9

29.2

(11.3)

(4.6)

39.0

NET
ASSETS
£M

2,387.1

0.5

2,387.6

76.1

18.0

278.4

2016

NUMBER
OF ORDINARY
SHARES
MILLION

278.6

1.0

279.6

2,481.7

279.6

(76.1)

(18.0)

(64.9)

-

2,322.7

279.6

(38.9)

-

12.5

10.5

(4.1)

(1.6)

14.0

NET ASSET
VALUE PER
SHARE 
£

8.57

8.54

0.27

0.07

8.88

(0.27)

(0.07)

(0.23)

-

8.31

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

24 Performance measures continued

The calculations of diluted net asset value per share show the potentially dilutive effect of share options outstanding at the Balance Sheet date and include 
the increase in shareholders’ equity which would arise on the exercise of those options. 

In accordance with EPRA recommendations, the adjustment for the fair value of derivatives at 30 September 2016 excludes those interest rate swaps which 
were cancelled in October 2016.

Net asset value return

EPRA NAV at 1 October (A)

EPRA NAV at 30 September

Increase during the year

Dividends paid during the year

NAV return (B)

NAV return % (B/A)

Financing ratios

Loan-to-value and gearing

Nominal value of debt

Cash and cash equivalents

Net debt (A)

Fair value of investment properties (B)

Loan-to-value (A/B)

EPRA net assets (C)

Gearing (A/C)

Interest cover

2017
PENCE

888.00

952.00

64.00

15.45

79.45

8.9%

2016

SHARE OF 
JOINT 
VENTURE
£M

60.0

(2.0)

58.0

224.4

25.8%

2016
PENCE

869.00

888.00

19.00

14.08

33.08

3.8%

TOTAL
£M

827.7

(17.6)

810.1

3,348.0

24.2%

2,481.7

32.6%

WHOLLY-
OWNED 
BUSINESS
£M

959.8

(45.6)

914.2

3,418.9

26.7%

2017

SHARE OF 
JOINT 
VENTURE
£M

60.0

(0.6)

59.4

227.8

26.1%

WHOLLY-
OWNED 
BUSINESS
£M

767.7

(15.6)

752.1

3,123.6

24.1%

TOTAL
£M

1,019.8

(46.2)

973.6

3,646.7

26.7%

2,665.3

36.5%

Operating profit before investment property disposals 
and valuation movements (A)

74.2

7.9

82.1

70.0

6.6

76.6

Finance costs

Finance income

Net finance costs (B)

Interest cover (A/B)

32.8

(0.1)

32.7

2.3x

2.7

-

2.7

2.9x

35.5

(0.1)

35.4

2.3x

33.7

(0.1)

33.6

2.1x

2.7

-

2.7

2.4x

36.4

(0.1)

36.3

2.1x

For the wholly-owned group, the blended cost of debt is 3.19% (2016: 4.47%). This is calculated using the drawn cost of borrowings of 2.99% (2016: 4.45%) 
plus the cost of commitment fees on undrawn bank facilities of 0.69% (2016: 0.70%). At 30 September 2017, the undrawn bank facilities totalled £275.0 
million (2016: £59.3 million). For total debt, the blended cost of debt is 3.26% (2016: 4.52%) and includes the impact of our share of debt in our joint 
venture of £60 million (2016: £60 million), upon which interest is charged at 4.43% (2016: 4.43%).

See also pages 50 to 54 in the Strategic Report for explanations of why we use these performance measures.

137

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

25 Operating leases

The Group as lessor
Future aggregate minimum rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases based on contracted rental income at the year end:

Not later than one year

Later than one year but not later than five years

Later than five years but not later than ten years

Later than ten years

2017
£M

96.1

241.5

144.5

107.8

589.9

2016
£M

84.2

234.2

143.8

98.7

560.9

The Group has over 1,250 leases granted to its tenants. These vary depending on the individual tenant and the respective property and demise. Typical lease 
terms are set out in the Strategic Report on pages 43 to 47.

The Company as a lessee
Future aggregate minimum payments in respect of a non-cancellable operating lease based on annual amounts payable at the year end:

Not later than one year

Later than one year but not later than five years

Later than five years but not later than ten years

Later than ten years

The Company leases its head office accommodation from a wholly-owned subsidiary. 

26 Related party transactions 

2017
£M

0.4

1.6

2.0

0.6

4.6

2016
£M

0.4

1.6

2.0

1.0

5.0

During the year, the Company received administrative fees, dividends and interest from its subsidiaries. The Company leases its office accommodation from 
a subsidiary and paid interest on amounts due to subsidiaries. The Company also received interest on a loan and administrative fees from the joint venture. 
These transactions are summarised below:

Transactions with subsidiaries:

Administrative fees receivable

Dividends receivable

Interest receivable

Interest payable

Rents payable

Amounts due from subsidiaries

Amounts due to subsidiaries

Transactions with joint venture:

Administrative fees receivable

Dividends receivable

Interest receivable

Amount due from joint venture

AS RESTATED
2016
£M

2017
£M

11.4

177.3

12.8

1.4

0.4

482.7

(100.6)

0.1

4.8

-

0.9

11.7

592.5

18.9

-

0.4

769.1

(13.5)

0.2

1.7

0.1

0.9

All amounts are unsecured, repayable on demand and bear a market rate of interest. Directors are considered the only key management personnel. Apart 
from the directors’ remuneration set out in the Annual Remuneration Report on pages 92 to 100, there were no other transactions with directors. 

See notes 13 and 15 for information on the restatement of amounts due from/to subsidiaries.

138

Other information

139

Alternative Performance 
Measures (APMs)

The Group has applied the European Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA) guidelines on alternative performance measures in these annual results. An APM 
is a financial measure of historical or future financial performance, position or cash flows of the Group which is not a measure defined or specified in IFRS.

Set out below is a summary of APMs used in this Annual Report – some of which are EPRA performance measures, which are a set of standard disclosures for the 
property industry, as defined by EPRA in its Best Practice Recommendations.    

APM

NEAREST IFRS MEASURE

EXPLANATION AND RECONCILIATION

EPRA earnings and earnings per share

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year

Note 24 and Strategic Report (page 51)

Basic earnings per share

Adjusted earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

Strategic Report (page 53)

Net asset value per share

Net assets attributable to shareholders

Note 24 and Strategic Report (page 54)

Diluted net asset value per share

Net assets attributable to shareholders

Note 24

EPRA net assets and NAV

Net asset value return

Net assets

N/A

Note 24 and Strategic Report (page 54)

Note 24 and Strategic Report (page 54)

Total portfolio

Valuation growth

Investment properties

Strategic Report (pages 37 and 50)

Net surplus on revaluation of investment properties

Strategic Report (pages 37 and 50) and Glossary

Portfolio net investment

N/A

Glossary

Total debt 

Net debt

Group LTV

Gearing

Blended cost of debt

Interest cover

Borrowings 

Note 24 and Strategic Report (pages 50 and 57)

Borrowings less cash and cash equivalents

Note 24 and Strategic Report (pages 50 and 57)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Note 24 and Strategic Report (pages 50 and 57)

Note 24 and Strategic Report (pages 50 and 57)

Note 24 and Strategic Report (pages 50 and 57) 

Note 24 and Strategic Report (pages 50 and 57) 

Where this report uses like-for-like comparisons, these are defined within the Glossary.

EPRA Measures 
The following is a summary of the EPRA performance measures included in this Annual Report. The measures are defined in the Glossary.

MEASURE

Earnings

DEFINITION

Earnings from operational activities, excluding fair value movements in 
respect of properties and interest rate swaps and deferred tax arising in 
our joint venture

Earnings per share

EPRA earnings per weighted number of ordinary shares

Net assets

NAV per share

Triple net assets

Net assets adjusted to remove fair value movements on interest rate 
swaps and deferred tax arising in our joint venture

Diluted EPRA net assets per share

EPRA net assets adjusted to include the fair value of financial instruments 
and debt

Triple NAV (NNNAV)

Diluted triple net assets per share

Net Initial Yield (NIY)

Current annualised rental income less non-recoverable property costs as 
a % of property valuation plus assumed purchasers’ costs

Topped-up NIY

NIY adjusted to reflect expiry of rent-free periods and stepped rents

Vacancy

Cost ratio

140

ERV of vacant space as a % of ERV of all properties

Total costs (including direct vacancy costs) as a % of gross rental income

PAGE

51

2017

£45.2m

2016

£39.0m

51

54

54

136

136

143

143

41

141

16.2p

14.0p

£2,665.3m

£2.481.7m

£9.52

£8.88

£2,622.9m

£2,322.7m

£9.37

2.77%

2.89%

6.0%

26.9%

£8.31

3.00%

3.08%

1.6%

27.8%

STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  ALTERNATIvE PERFORMANCE MEASURES (APMS)  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

As disclosed in note 1 to the financial statements, all of the Group’s properties are in one geographic location and are managed as a single portfolio. As such, we do 
not report on a segmental basis. Like-for-like calculations of growth in values and rents are therefore stated on an aggregated basis.

EPRA COST RATIO

Gross rental income

Revenue

Less: recoverable property expenses

Share of joint venture rents receivable

Cost 

Property charges

Less: recoverable property expenses

Share of joint venture property expenses

Administrative expenses

Share of joint venture administrative expenses

Total costs

Less: charge for share-based remuneration

Total costs excluding share-based payments

EPRA cost ratio

Cost ratio excluding share-based payments

NOTE

2017
£M

2016
£M

2

2

11

3

3

11

11

5

111.5

106.2

(8.1)

8.9

(7.8)

7.5

112.3

105.9

23.2

(8.1)

0.9

14.1

0.1

30.2

(1.4)

28.8

22.1

(7.8)

0.8

14.1

0.2

29.4

(1.9)

27.5

26.9%

25.6%

27.8%

26.0%

Note: We do not capitalise property nor administrative expenses. The figures above include vacancy costs. Given the nature of our portfolio, it is impractical to separate these out. 

Investment properties
Whilst our portfolio is geographically concentrated in London’s West End, it is granular in nature, with almost 600, generally small, buildings, often clustered 
in contiguous blocks. It is not practical to provide detailed property-by-property information recommended by EPRA’s BPR. However, an analysis of our 
portfolio, split by destination and occupier use, is set out on pages 142 to 143. 

We own 100% of our properties, except for property held by our Longmartin joint venture, in which we have a 50% interest. The breakdown of our 
wholly-owned portfolio between freehold and long leasehold ownership is set out on page 123.

At 30 September 2017, we had 772 commercial and 516 residential tenants, with no individual tenant representing a material amount of our current 
annualised income. The ten largest commercial tenants represented just 10.5% of current annualised income. As our tenant base is so granular, we do not 
believe listing the top ten tenants, nor a detailed analysis of tenant business sector is useful. However, the analysis on pages 142 to 143 sets out details of 
income and rental values by destination and occupier use.

EPRA vacancy by occupier use is set out on pages 40 to 41.

Development disclosures
Our wholly-owned portfolio is all within Conservation Areas and around 20% of our buildings are listed. We do not carry out material speculative developments. 
Our capital expenditure commitments are low, representing an average of 1.1% of portfolio value over the past five years. Included in this are numerous 
small schemes, and no one scheme is material. 

At 30 September 2017, we had one larger scheme underway, details of which are set out on page 49. An overview of assets held for, or undergoing, 
refurbishment is set out on pages 48 to 49.

141

Portfolio analysis

Basis of valuation 

Portfolio analysis 

AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2017

Portfolio

Fair value (£m) 

Restaurants,  
cafés and leisure

Shops

% of total fair value

Current income (£m)

ERV (£m)

Number

Area – sq. ft.

% of current income 

% of ERV

Average unexpired lease length – years 

Number

Area – sq. ft.

% of current income 

% of ERV 

Average unexpired lease length – years

Offices

Area – sq. ft.

% of current income

% of ERV 

Average unexpired lease length – years 

Residential

Number

Area – sq. ft.

% of current passing rent

% of ERV 

1  Shaftesbury Group’s 50% share

Basis of valuation 

AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2017 

Overall initial yield 

Topped-up initial yield

Overall equivalent yield

Tone of restaurant equivalent yields 

Tone of restaurant ERVs - £ per sq. ft.

Tone of retail equivalent yields 

Tone of retail ERVs - ITZA £ per sq. ft.

Tone of office equivalent yields

Tone of office ERVs - £ per sq. ft.

Average residential ERVs - £ per sq. ft. per annum

142

NOTE

1,14

2,14

3,14

CARNABY

1,265.5

35%

39.7

51.2

58

COvENT 
GARDEN

947.2

26%

28.2

36.4

90

CHINATOWN

791.5

22%

23.8

30.3

79

SOHO

272.1

7%

8.9

10.7

31

WHOLLY- 

OWNED 

FITZROvIA

PORTFOLIO

LONGMARTIN1

PORTFOLIO

140.2

3,416.5

227.8

3,644.3

TOTAL 

100%

114.1

144.5

109,000

176,000

211,000

59,000

50,000

605,000

39,000

4

4

5

4

4

5

4

4

5

4

4

16%

17%

10

99

39%

34%

9

95

62%

59%

11

60

41%

39%

9

39

182,000

143,000

92,000

43,000

14,000

474,000

73,000

49%

46%

4

28%

32%

4

21%

25%

5

25%

28%

4

244,000

85,000

28,000

36,000

10,000

403,000

102,000

28%

31%

5

97

12%

15%

4

216

4%

4%

4

130

15%

17%

3

68

56,000

133,000

86,000

36,000

25,000

336,000

55,000

7%

6%

21%

19%

13%

12%

19%

16%

4%

4.7

5.5

24

54%

54%

8

9

13%

13%

6

8%

8%

3

51

25%

25%

94%

105.3

134.1

282

37%

34%

10

302

33%

35%

4

17%

19%

4

562

13%

12%

6%

8.8

10.4

9

15%

13%

14

22

36%

41%

3

34%

34%

6

75

15%

12%

NOTE

CARNABY

COvENT 
GARDEN

2.64%

2.76%

3.36%

CHINATOWN

2.65%

2.75%

3.42%

SOHO

2.92%

2.96%

3.49%

2.90%

3.04%

3.56%

3.40% - 3.90%   3.35% - 3.90% 3.50% - 3.75% 3.50% - 3.85%

£110 - £145

£55 - £178 £270 - £405 (ITZA)

£110 - £135

3.35% - 3.95% 3.35% - 4.00% 3.50% - 4.25% 3.50% - 4.25%

£125 - £525

£100 - £480

£140 - £355

£165 - £280

4.00% - 4.50% 4.00% - 4.25%

4.25% 4.25% - 4.60%

£58 - £83

£50 - £75

£43 - £60

£50 - £73

£52

£49

£41

£48

7

8

9

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

FITZROvIA

PORTFOLIO

LONGMARTIN

WHOLLY- 

OWNED 

2.77%

2.89%

3.46%

3.31%

3.25%

3.80%

3.75%  - 4.00%

£90 - £138

3.40% - 4.15%

£94 - £710

4.00% - 4.50%

£63 - £78

£49

2.86%

2.93%

3.36%

3.35% - 4.00%

£93 - £120

3.40% - 4.50%

£100  - £215

4.00% - 4.50%

£48 - £60

£54

STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2017

Portfolio

Fair value (£m) 

CARNABY

1,265.5

COvENT 

GARDEN

947.2

CHINATOWN

FITZROvIA

WHOLLY- 
OWNED 
PORTFOLIO

LONGMARTIN1

TOTAL 
PORTFOLIO

140.2

3,416.5

227.8

3,644.3

4%

4.7

5.5

24

94%

105.3

134.1

282

6%

8.8

10.4

9

100%

114.1

144.5

109,000

176,000

211,000

59,000

50,000

605,000

39,000

54%

54%

8

9

37%

34%

10

302

15%

13%

14

22

182,000

143,000

92,000

43,000

14,000

474,000

73,000

13%

13%

6

33%

35%

4

36%

41%

3

Offices

Area – sq. ft.

244,000

85,000

28,000

36,000

10,000

403,000

102,000

56,000

133,000

86,000

36,000

25,000

336,000

55,000

25%

25%

13%

12%

15%

12%

8%

8%

3

51

17%

19%

4

562

34%

34%

6

75

35%

39.7

51.2

58

16%

17%

10

99

49%

46%

4

28%

31%

5

97

7%

6%

26%

28.2

36.4

90

39%

34%

9

95

28%

32%

4

12%

15%

4

216

21%

19%

791.5

22%

23.8

30.3

79

62%

59%

11

60

21%

25%

5

4%

4%

4

130

13%

12%

SOHO

272.1

7%

8.9

10.7

31

41%

39%

9

39

25%

28%

4

15%

17%

3

68

19%

16%

Restaurants,  

cafés and leisure

Average unexpired lease length – years 

Shops

% of total fair value

Current income (£m)

ERV (£m)

Number

Area – sq. ft.

% of current income 

% of ERV

Number

Area – sq. ft.

% of current income 

% of ERV 

Average unexpired lease length – years

% of current income

% of ERV 

Average unexpired lease length – years 

Residential

Number

Area – sq. ft.

% of current passing rent

% of ERV 

1  Shaftesbury Group’s 50% share

Basis of valuation 

AT 30 SEPTEMBER 2017 

Overall initial yield 

Topped-up initial yield

Overall equivalent yield

Tone of restaurant equivalent yields 

Tone of restaurant ERVs - £ per sq. ft.

Tone of retail equivalent yields 

Tone of retail ERVs - ITZA £ per sq. ft.

Tone of office equivalent yields

Tone of office ERVs - £ per sq. ft.

Average residential ERVs - £ per sq. ft. per annum

NOTE

CARNABY

CHINATOWN

COvENT 

GARDEN

2.64%

2.76%

3.36%

2.90%

3.04%

3.56%

2.65%

2.75%

3.42%

SOHO

2.92%

2.96%

3.49%

3.40% - 3.90%   3.35% - 3.90% 3.50% - 3.75% 3.50% - 3.85%

£110 - £145

£55 - £178 £270 - £405 (ITZA)

£110 - £135

3.35% - 3.95% 3.35% - 4.00% 3.50% - 4.25% 3.50% - 4.25%

£125 - £525

£100 - £480

£140 - £355

£165 - £280

4.00% - 4.50% 4.00% - 4.25%

4.25% 4.25% - 4.60%

£58 - £83

£50 - £75

£43 - £60

£50 - £73

£52

£49

£41

£48

FITZROvIA

2.86%

2.93%

3.36%

3.35% - 4.00%

£93 - £120

3.40% - 4.50%

£100  - £215

4.00% - 4.50%

£48 - £60

£54

WHOLLY- 
OWNED 
PORTFOLIO

2.77%

2.89%

3.46%

LONGMARTIN

3.31%

3.25%

3.80%

3.75%  - 4.00%

£90 - £138

3.40% - 4.15%

£94 - £710

4.00% - 4.50%

£63 - £78

£49

NOTE

1,14

2,14

3,14

4

4

5

4

4

5

4

4

5

4

4

7

8

9

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Notes
1. 

 The fair values at 30 September 2017 (the “valuation date”) shown in 
respect of the individual villages are, in each case, the aggregate of 
the fair values of several different property interests located within 
close proximity which, for the purpose of this analysis, are combined 
to create each village. The different interests within each village were 
not valued as a single lot.

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

 Current income includes total annualised actual and ‘estimated 
income’ reserved by leases. No rent is attributed to leases which 
were subject to rent-free periods at the valuation date. Current 
income does not reflect any ground rents, head rents nor rent 
charges and estimated irrecoverable outgoings at the valuation date. 
‘Estimated income’ refers to gross estimated rental values in respect 
of rent reviews outstanding at the valuation date and, where 
appropriate, ERV in respect of lease renewals outstanding at the 
valuation date where the fair value reflects terms for a renewed lease.

 ERV is the respective valuers’ opinion of the rental value of the 
properties, or parts thereof, reflecting the terms of the relevant 
leases or, if appropriate, reflecting the fact that certain of the 
properties, or parts thereof, have been valued on the basis of vacant 
possession and the assumed grant of a new lease. Where appropriate, 
ERV assumes completion of developments which are reflected in the 
valuations. ERV does not reflect any ground rents, head rents nor rent 
charges and estimated irrecoverable outgoings. 

 The percentage of current income and the percentage of ERV in each 
of the use sectors are expressed as a percentage of total income and 
total ERV for each village.

 Average unexpired lease length has been calculated by weighting the 
leases in terms of current rent reserved under the relevant leases 
and, where relevant, by reference to tenants’ options to determine 
leases in advance of expiry through effluxion of time.

 Where mixed uses occur within single leases, for the purpose of this 
analysis, the majority use by rental value has been adopted.

 The initial yield is the net initial income at the valuation date 
expressed as a percentage of the gross valuation. Yields reflect net 
income after deduction of any ground rents, head rents and rent 
charges and estimated irrecoverable outgoings at the valuation date.

 The topped-up initial yield, ignoring contractual rent-free periods, 
has been calculated as if the contracted rent is payable from the 
valuation date and as if any future stepped rental uplifts under leases 
had occurred.

 Equivalent yield is the internal rate of return, being the discount rate 
which needs to be applied to the expected flow of income so that the 
total amount of income so discounted at this rate equals the capital 
outlay at values current as of the valuation date. The equivalent yield 
shown for each village has been calculated by merging together the 
cash flows and fair values of each of the different interests within 
each village and represents the average equivalent yield attributable 
to each village from this approach.

10.   The tone of rental values and yields is the range of rental values or 

yields attributed to the majority of the properties.

11.   All commercial floor areas are net lettable. All residential floor areas 

are gross internal. 

12.   For presentation purposes some percentages have been rounded to 

the nearest integer.

13.   The analysis includes accommodation which is awaiting, or 

undergoing, refurbishment or development and is not available for 
occupation at the date of valuation. 

14.   The analysis excludes a non-core asset, acquired as part of a portfolio 

during the year.

143

Summary report 

by the valuers

Summary report
by the valuers
To the directors of Shaftesbury PLC 

In accordance with your instructions, we have undertaken a valuation of the 
various commercial and residential freehold and long leasehold property 
interests as at 30th September 2017 (the “Valuation Date”) held by Shaftesbury 
Carnaby PLC, Shaftesbury Covent Garden Limited, Shaftesbury Chinatown 
PLC, Shaftesbury Soho Limited, Shaftesbury AV Limited, Shaftesbury CL 
Limited, Shaftesbury West End Limited and Helcon Limited, which are 
subsidiary companies (collectively referred to as the “Subsidiary Companies”) 
of Shaftesbury PLC (the “Company”), as referred to in our Valuation Reports 
dated 24 November 2017 (“our Reports”). Our Reports were prepared for 
accounts purposes.

All properties have been subject to external inspections between January 
and October 2017 and a number were subject to internal inspections.

We confirm that the valuations and Reports have been prepared in 
accordance with the RICS Valuation – Global Standards which incorporate 
the International Valuation Standards (“IVS”) and the RICS UK Valuation 
Standards (the “RICS Red Book”) edition current at the Valuation Date. It 
follows that the valuations are compliant with IVS. We confirm that all valuers 
who have contributed to the valuation have complied with the requirements 
of PS 1 of the RICS Red Book. We confirm that we have sufficient current 
knowledge of the relevant markets, and the skills and understanding to undertake 
the valuation competently. We confirm that Charles Smith has overall 
responsibility for the valuations and is in a position to provide an objective 
and unbiased valuation and is competent to undertake the valuations. 
Finally, we confirm that we have undertaken the valuations acting as an 
External Valuer as defined in the RICS Red Book.

In accordance with PS 2.5 and UKVS 4, we are required to make certain 
disclosures in connection with this valuation instruction and our relationship 
with the Company and the Subsidiary Companies. Charles Smith has been 
the signatory of valuation reports addressed to the Company and the 
Subsidiary Companies since 2013. Cushman & Wakefield Debenham Tie 
Leung Limited (“C&W”) has been carrying out this valuation instruction for 
the Company, and now the Subsidiary Companies, for a continuous period 
since 1996. As well as preparing our Reports, we also undertake valuations  
of certain of the properties referred to in our Reports for other purposes, 
such as secured lending and for inclusion in shareholders’ circulars. 

On 1st September 2015, DTZ acquired Cushman & Wakefield and the 
combined group now trades under the Cushman & Wakefield brand. 
Cushman & Wakefield’s financial year end is 31st December. The proportion 
of fees payable by the Company to the Cushman & Wakefield group in the 
financial year to 31st December 2016 was less than 5%. We anticipate that 
the proportion of fees payable by the Company to the Cushman & Wakefield 
group in the financial year to 31st December 2017 will remain at less than 5%.

Prior to 1st September 2015, there had been no fee-earning instructions 
between DTZ and the Company or the Subsidiary Companies, other than 
valuation instructions, for in excess of four years. Prior to 1st September 
2015, Cushman & Wakefield were appointed, until recently, as retail agents 
by Shaftesbury Soho Limited and Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC. C&W are 
currently appointed as retail agents on behalf of Shaftesbury Chinatown PLC 
in respect of the property known as Central Cross.

In accordance with the provisions of VPS3 of the RICS Red Book edition 
current at the Valuation Date, in undertaking our valuations we have lotted 
together certain individual properties to form a separate property (each 
referred to as a “Property”, collectively as the “Properties”) in the manner 
we consider to be most likely to be adopted in the case of an actual sale.  
We consider that lotting the properties together on the basis reflected in 
our valuations would allow a purchaser to capitalise on the estate management 
advantages and opportunities available from such comprehensive ownership.

A high proportion of the total value of the Subsidiary Companies’ properties 
and Properties is accounted for by properties and Properties situated in 
adjacent and/or adjoining locations in four specific areas of the West End of 
London: Carnaby Street and its environs, Chinatown and the adjoining area 
immediately west of Wardour Street (south of its junction with Shaftesbury 
Avenue), and the areas around Seven Dials in the western part of Covent 
Garden and a block of properties to the east of the Central Covent Garden 
Piazza with its main frontage to Wellington Street. These areas are all 
dominated by retail and restaurant uses. In our opinion, at the Valuation 
Date, this particular unusual confluence of ownership and use characteristics 
may cause some prospective purchasers to regard parts of the portfolio 
when combined as having a greater value than the aggregate of the individual 
values of the combined properties and Properties which make up those parts.

As required by the provisions of the RICS Red Book, in undertaking our 
valuations, we have valued each property or Property separately, rather 
than valuing the portfolio as a whole or in combinations of parts. The “total” 
valuation figure below is the aggregated value of the separate properties or 
Properties within the various categories of tenure referred to below.

All valuations were on the basis of Fair Value. We have assessed Fair Value in 
accordance with VPS4 item 7 of the RICS Red Book. Under these provisions, 
the term “Fair Value” means the definition adopted by the International 
Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) in IFRS 13, namely “The price that 
would be received to sell an asset, or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly 
transaction between market participants at the measurement date”.

Under IFRS 13, The Fair Value Hierarchy, the property we have valued is 
designated as Level 3 inputs. Level 3 inputs have been designated as 
unobservable inputs. Unobservable inputs are used to measure fair value to 
the extent that relevant observable inputs are not available, thereby allowing 
for situations in which there is little, if any, market activity for the asset or 
liability at the measurement date. An entity develops unobservable inputs 
using the best information available in the circumstances, which might 
include the entity’s own data, taking into account all information about 
market participant assumptions that is reasonably available (IFRS 13:87-89).

144

STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  SUMMARY REPORT BY THE vALUERS  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017

Our opinion of the Fair Value of each of the properties has been primarily 
derived using comparable recent market transactions on arm’s length terms.  

We have not made any allowance for vendor’s sale costs nor for any tax 
liabilities which may arise upon the disposal of any of the properties or 
Properties. We have made deductions to reflect purchasers’ normal 
acquisition costs.

Having regard to the foregoing, we are of the opinion that the aggregates of 
the Fair Values, as at 30th September 2017, of the freehold and long 
leasehold property interests owned by the Company and the Subsidiary 
Companies, subject to the Assumptions and comments in our Reports 
dated 24 November 2017, were as follows: 

A full explanation of the Assumptions made in our valuations and details of 
the sources of information are contained within our Reports.

Freehold Properties

We have measured certain of the properties, or parts of properties, either 
on site or by scaling from floor plans. The Company, its managing agents or 
professional advisors have provided us with the floor areas of the remaining 
properties or parts of properties.

Long leasehold  
Properties

We have read some of the leases and related documents provided to us in 
respect of the commercial properties. Where we have not read leases, we 
have relied on tenancy information provided by the Company, its managing 
agents or professional advisors.

Total

£3,133,015,000 
(Three billion, one hundred and thirty-three 
million and fifteen thousand pounds) 

£285,925,000 
(Two hundred and eighty-five million, nine  
hundred and twenty-five thousand pounds)

£3,418,940,000 
(Three billion, four hundred and eighteen 
million, nine hundred and forty thousand 
pounds)

Certain properties were subject to works of repair or refurbishment at 30th 
September 2017, or were subject to outstanding retentions and fees in 
respect of projects already completed at that date. In these instances, the 
Company advised us of the amount of the outstanding costs. The costs will 
be borne by the Company as they are not recoverable from tenants. We 
have reflected these costs in our valuations. The total amount of such costs 
is £11,494,050 and details of the individual sums are included in our Reports.

As referred to above, we have lotted together certain individual properties 
to form a number of separate Properties. In the case of five Properties 
which comprise a number of individual properties, the majority of such 
properties are held freehold but certain of them are held on long leases. In 
order to divide our valuation of these Properties between the categories of 
freehold and long leasehold, we have undertaken notional apportionments 
of value between the freehold elements and the long leasehold elements 
which together comprise the relevant Properties. The amounts arising from 
these notional apportionments of value have been included in the figures 
representing the freehold and long leasehold categories below. The 
amounts arising from the notional apportionments do not themselves 
represent the Fair Value of the two elements.

The Subsidiary Companies own a number of properties on a freehold basis 
where they also hold long leasehold interests within the freehold and have 
not merged the interests. For the purposes of the freehold/long leasehold 
split below, we have included such properties within the freehold category.

A long lease is one with an unexpired term in excess of 50 years.

The contents of our Reports are confidential to Shaftesbury PLC, 
Shaftesbury Covent Garden Limited, Shaftesbury Carnaby PLC, Shaftesbury 
Chinatown PLC, Shaftesbury Soho Limited, Shaftesbury AV Limited, 
Shaftesbury CL Limited, Shaftesbury West End Limited and Helcon Limited 
for the specific purpose to which they refer and are for their use only. 
Consequently, and in accordance with current practice, no responsibility is 
accepted to any other party in respect of the whole or any part of the 
contents of our Reports or this summary report. Before our Reports or this 
summary report, or any part thereof, are reproduced or referred to, in any 
document, circular or statement, and before their contents, or any part 
thereof, are disclosed orally or otherwise to a third party, the valuer’s 
written approval as to the form and context of such publication or 
disclosure must first be obtained. For the avoidance of doubt, such approval 
is required whether or not Cushman & Wakefield Debenham Tie Leung 
Limited is referred to by name and whether or not the contents of our 
Reports or this summary report are combined with others. 

Charles Smith MRICS 
International Partner 
RICS Registered Valuer

For and on behalf of  
Cushman & Wakefield Debenham Tie Leung Limited

145

Shareholder 

Information

Shareholder 
information

Corporate Timetable

FINANCIAL CALENDAR

Annual General Meeting and AGM statement

9 February 2018

Registrar
Equiniti Limited 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex, BN99 6DA

2018 half year results

DIvIDENDS AND BOND INTEREST

Proposed 2017 final dividend: 

  Ex-dividend

  Record date

  Payment date

2018 interim dividend to be paid

Bond interest

May 2018

Telephone 0371 384 2294 (International +44 121 415 7047). Lines open 
8.30am to 5.30pm, Monday to Friday.

Shareholder accounts may be accessed online through www.shareview.
co.uk. This gives secure access to account information instructions. There is 
also a Shareview dealing service which is a simple and convenient way to buy 
or sell shares in the Group.

18 January 2018

19 January 2018

16 February 2018

July 2018

31 March and  
30 September 2018

Effect of REIT status on payment of 
dividends
As a REIT, we do not pay UK corporation tax in respect of rental profits and 
chargeable gains relating to our property rental business. However, we are 
required to distribute at least 90% of the qualifying income (broadly 
calculated using the UK tax rules) as a PID.

Certain categories of shareholder may be able to receive the PID element of 
their dividends gross, without deduction of withholding tax. Categories 
which may claim this exemption include: UK companies, charities, local 
authorities, UK pension schemes and managers of PEPs, ISAs and Child Trust 
Funds.

Further information and the forms for completion to apply for PIDs to be 
paid gross are available on the Group’s website or from the registrar. 

Where the Group pays an ordinary dividend this will be treated in the same 
way as dividends from non-REIT companies. The 2017 final dividend is being 
paid entirely as an ordinary dividend. 

146

STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017 
Glossary of terms

Glossary
of terms

Annualised current income
Total annualised actual and ‘estimated 
income’ reserved by leases at a 
valuation date. No rent is attributed 
to leases which were subject to 
rent-free periods at that date. It does 
not reflect any ground rents, head 
rents nor rent charges and estimated 
irrecoverable outgoings at the 
valuation date. ‘Estimated income’ 
refers to gross ERVs in respect of rent 
reviews outstanding at the valuation 
date and, where appropriate, ERV in 
respect of lease renewals outstanding 
at the valuation date where the fair 
value reflects terms for a renewed 
lease. Like-for-like growth in 
annualised current income is the 
change during a period, adjusted to 
remove the impact of acquisitions 
and disposals, expressed as a 
percentage of annualised current 
income at the start of the period. 

Alternative Performance Measure 
(APM)
A financial measure of historical or 
future financial performance, position 
or cash flows of the Group which is not 
a measure defined or specified in IFRS. 

Best Practices Recommendations 
(BPR)
Standards set out by EPRA to provide 
comparable reporting between 
investment property companies.

Blended cost of debt
Weighted average cost of drawn 
borrowings, plus non-utilisation fees 
on undrawn borrowings.

Compound Annual Growth Rate 
(CAGR)
The year-on-year growth rate of an 
investment over a specified period of 
time. 

Diluted net asset value per share
Net asset value per share taking into 
account the dilutive effect of 
potential vesting of share options. 

EPRA
European Public Real Estate Association. 

EPRA adjustments
Standard adjustments to calculate 
EPRA measures, in accordance with 
its BPR. 

EPRA cost ratio
Total costs as a percentage of gross 
rental income. 

EPRA earnings
The level of recurring income arising 
from core operational activities. It 
excludes all items which are not 
relevant to the underlying and 
recurring portfolio performance. 

EPRA EPS
EPRA earnings divided by the 
weighted average number of shares in 
issue during a reporting period. 

EPRA net assets
Net assets adjusted for items that are 
not expected to crystallise in normal 
circumstances, such as the fair value 
of derivative financial instruments and 
deferred tax on property valuation 
surpluses. It includes additional equity if 
all vested share options were exercised. 

EPRA NAV
EPRA net assets per share, including 
the potentially dilutive effect of 
outstanding options granted over 
ordinary shares. 

EPRA triple net assets 
EPRA net assets amended to include 
the fair value of financial instruments 
and debt. 

EPRA NNNAV
EPRA NAV amended to include the fair 
value of financial instruments and debt. 

EPRA vacancy
The rental value of vacant property 
available expressed as a percentage of 
ERV of the total portfolio. 

Equivalent yield
Equivalent yield is the internal rate of 
return from an investment property, 
based on the gross outlays for the 
purchase of a property (including 
purchase costs), reflecting reversions 
to current market rent, and such 
items as voids and non-recoverable 
expenditure but disregarding potential 
changes in market rents.

European Public Real Estate 
Association (EPRA)
EPRA develops policies for standards 
of reporting disclosure, ethics and 
industry practices. 

Estimated rental value (ERV)
ERV is the market rental value of 
properties owned by the Group, 
estimated by the Group’s valuers. 
Like-for-like ERV growth is the change 
in ERV during a period, adjusted to 
remove the impact of acquisitions and 
disposals, expressed as a percentage 
of ERV at the start of the period. 

Fair value
The amount at which an asset or 
liability could be exchanged between 
two knowledgeable, willing and 
unconnected parties in an arm’s 
length transaction at the valuation date. 

Gearing
Nominal value of Group borrowings 
expressed as a percentage of EPRA 
net assets. 

Interest cover
Operating profit before investment 
property disposals and valuation 
movements, divided by finance costs 
net of finance income. 

Like-for-like growth in rents 
receivable
The increase in rents receivable during 
an accounting period, adjusted to 
remove the impact of acquisitions, 
disposals and changes as a result of 
larger refurbishment schemes, 
expressed as a percentage of rents 
receivable in the corresponding 
previous accounting period. 

Loan-to-value (LTV)
Nominal value of borrowings 
expressed as a percentage of the fair 
value of property assets. 

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
An arrangement under which an 
employee is awarded options in the 
Company at nil cost, subject to a 
period of continued employment and 
the attainment of NAV and TSR targets 
over a three-year vesting period. 

Net asset value (NAV) 
Equity shareholders’ funds divided by 
the number of ordinary shares at the 
balance sheet date. 

Net asset value return
The change in EPRA NAV per ordinary 
share plus dividends paid per ordinary 
share during the period of calculation, 
expressed as a percentage of the 
EPRA NAV per share at the beginning 
of the period. 

Net initial yield
Net initial income at the date of 
valuation expressed as a percentage 
of the gross valuation. Yields reflect 
net income after deduction of any 
ground rents, head rents, rent 
charges and estimated irrecoverable 
outgoings. 

Net investment
Acquisitions and capital expenditure 
less disposals in a period.

Portfolio reversionary potential
The amount by which the ERV 
exceeds current income, measured at 
a valuation date. 

Property Income Distribution (PID)
A PID is a distribution by a REIT to its 
shareholders paid out of qualifying 
profits. A REIT is required to distribute 
at least 90% of its qualifying profits as 
a PID to its shareholders. 

Real Estate Investment Trust (REIT)
A REIT is a tax designation for an entity 
or group investing in real estate that 
reduces or eliminates corporation tax 
on rental profits and chargeable gains 
relating to the rental business, 
providing certain criteria obligations 
set out in tax legislation are met. 

Topped-up net initial yield
Net initial yield adjusted to assume 
rent-free periods or other unexpired 
lease incentives, such as discounted 
rent periods and stepped rents, have 
expired. 

Total Shareholder Return (TSR)
The change in the market price of an 
ordinary share plus dividends 
reinvested expressed as a percentage 
of the share price at the beginning of 
the period.

Valuation growth
The valuation movement and realised 
surpluses or deficits arising from the 
Group’s investment property portfolio 
expressed as a percentage return on 
the valuation at the beginning of the 
period adjusted, on a time weighted 
basis, for acquisitions, disposals and 
capital expenditure. When measured 
on a like-for-like basis, the calculation 
excludes those properties acquired 
or sold during the period. 

147

STRATEGIC REPORT  OTHER INFORMATION  Shaftesbury Annual Report 2017Design:  SG Design (sg-design.co.uk)

Print:   Park Communications on FSC® certified paper.

Park is an EMAS certified company and its Environmental 
Management System is certified to ISO 14001.

100% of the inks used are vegetable oil based, 95% 
of press chemicals are recycled for further use and, 
on average, 99% of any waste associated with this 
production will be recycled.

This document is printed on Arctic Matt, a paper 
containing 100% virgin fibre sourced from well 
managed, responsible, FSC® certified forests.  
Some pulp in this product is bleached using both 
elemental chlorine free (ECF) process and using a 
totally chlorine free (TCF) process.

SHAFTESBURY PLC 
22 Ganton Street 
Carnaby 
London W1F 7FD

T: 020 7333 8118

shaftesbury.co.uk

S

h

a

f

t

e

s

b

u

r

y

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

7